Home

Lexicon RV-8 Stereo Receiver User Manual

1. a 2 6 Tuner Overview I 2 10 Selecting a Station iet neris nene Ruhe qe Tuc CO 2 10 Direct Station 2 10 T ne Seek Access su osa 2 10 SCAN fere c 2 11 Loading Presets recette 2 11 Sii aa aqasha 2 11 Editing Presets u u 2 12 AUTO OA E 2 12 Amplifier Overview 2 12 Amplifier Channel 2 13 Making Connections With the Amplifier Output 2 13 Headphone Overview 2 13 Remote Control a 2 14 Operation 5 2 14 MAIN enU ninan 2 14 2 14 Menu Item Selection 2 15 Remote Control Buttons a 2 17 Command M atrix terea 2 18 Understanding the 2 2 26 Two Line Status a 2 28 STATUS aaa 2 29 STATUS Menu Parameter
2. D 6 RV 8 Appendix D NAET TN INPUT P ON P OFF SLEEP SWAP STILL CC ADD SOURC LOCAT CC SN DELET POSI 2 RESET PAGE1 J PAGE2 J SYSTEM OFF OFF POWER ON OFF VOL UP VOL UP VOLDN VOL DN CH UP SKIP CH DN SKIP MUTE MUTE PRE CH PRE CH UP UP DOWN DN LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT SELECT SELECT PLAY STOP REW FF M MENU MENU GUIDE GUIDE O EXIT EXIT II INFO INFO 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 DISPLAY DISPLAY ENTER ENTER CD Y ep PROG INTRO DISK1 DISK6 DISPL TIME DISK 2 CLEAR FADER DISK3 REPEA EDIT DISK4 A B DISK 5 PAGE J PAGE2 5 5 OFF POWER ON OFF VOL UP VOL DN CH UP CH DN TRACK MUTE PRE CH RANDOM UP DOWN LEFT SKIP RIGHT SKIP SELECT PLAY PLAY STOP STOP REW REW FF FF MENU M GUIDE Il INFO PAUSE 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 DISPLAY DISPLAY ENTER DISC PHONO PHONO D A FIA F B G B G C H C H D D l E J E J PAGE J PAGE2 SYSTEM OFF OFF POWER ON OFF VOL UP VOL UP VOL DN VOL DN CH UP CH UP CH DN CH DN MUTE MUTE PRE CH PRE CH UP UP DOWN DN LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT SELECT SELECT PLAY PLAY STOP STOP REW REW FF FF MENU GUIDE RECORD Il INFO PAUSE 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 DISPLA
3. di 12 2 RV 8 Appendix B SETUP MENU INPUTS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH I E 5 1 5 1 WI FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED DVD2 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD2 DIGITAL IN COAX 2 ANALOG IN NONE ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 2 COMPONENT IN 2 2 w FILM 9 5 1 Ii FILM ms Cities 5 FILM 5 1 5 1a W FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 SAT INPUT SETUP NAME SAT DIGITAL IN OPTICAL 1 ANALOG ANALOG 1 ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 3 COMPONENT IN 3 2 ETV 9 5 1 MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG ZONE2 ADVANCED VCR INPUT SETUP NAME VCR DIGITAL IN NONE ANALOGIN ANALOG2 ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 4 COMPONENT IN 3 2 CH tj FILM 010 5 1 IE FILM gj FILM 5 1a 5 1a LE FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG ZONE2 ADVANCED Selecting SETUP gt INPUTS prompts the selection of the desired input for example DVD 1 Selecting an input opens the corresponding IN PUT SETUP menu sho
4. gt FRONT PANEL DISPLAY ALWAYS ON STATUS AMASE gt 2 SECONDS BRIGHTNESS ALWAYS OFF OFF I OFF I 100 EE 6 75 50 25 Note When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF the front panel display immediately disappears Use the on screen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS BRIGHTNESS 100 75 50 25 Est gt EES gt GEE BEDS Controls the brightness of front panel display characters When a setting is selected front panel display illumination automatically adjusts to the selected brightness 3 66 RV 8 Setup MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AIV SYNC DELAY CUSTOM NAME EDIT CUSTOM NAME SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT A V SYNC DELAY gt Restores audio video synchronization when using products such as video processors that introduce a video signal delay This parameter can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the video signal delay OFF 1 to 60ms CUSTOM NAME EU Activates the display of a custom unit name which appears when the RV 8 is activated When set to ON the custom name scrolls across the on screen and front panel displays when the RV 8
5. 3 5 Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors 3 7 Selecting Preferred Listening 3 12 Configuring Advanced Input 0 3 17 INPUT SELECT Parameter 2 3 19 ZONE in Parameter 5 5 nnns 3 22 Speaker LT 3 25 Setting Crossover Points eene enne 3 25 Speaker Setup 3 29 Automatic Calibration sess 3 36 Manual 6f e rz neo 3 53 VO CGI MIG EES 3 60 IB e s Ee uuu 3 63 On Screen Display Setup 2 4 0 1 0 eene 3 64 Front panel Display 5 3 66 Volume Control 2 1 UM ad SR eR Pant Max A 3 68 Trigger SOU XC 3 70 Tuner SetuP 3 72 Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments 3 73 Esa d8 eis m iaiia 3 79 LVE CALIBRATION u uuu ua a lasa 3 80 Setup Lexicon SETUP Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MA
6. During speaker distance calibration the RV 8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu The cursor auto matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters highlighting each parameter while the RV 8 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker As it finishes each parameter the RV 8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label Because of the way low frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces automatic speaker dis tance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers For this reason the RV 8 does not send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration Instead the RV 8 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers These distances can be manually adjusted See PERFORM ING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTAN CE CALI BRA TION on page 3 54 This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV 8 calibrates output levels During speaker levels calibration the RV 8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu The cursor auto matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters highlighting each parame ter
7. 3 66 Volume Control 2 3 68 Trigger Setup 3 70 TUNG SCtUp i aici de wie iad 3 72 Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments 3 73 Lock Options ioi der eec aii 3 79 LIVE CALIBRATION 3 80 Introduction Lexicon Audio Controls Restoring Factory Default Settings 7 4 Audio Controls 4 2 Appendix A Tuner Presets Specifications tertinm ER d e use as A 2 Tuner Presets 5 12 50 eee endi e e e a tragos 5 2 Declaration of Conformity esses 4 Mode Adjust Appendix B Mode AdjUsE coser Lee Le ecd o us 6 2 Meni TeS conni nn rccte tct ere B 2 Listening Mode 6 2 Preferred Listening Mode Selection 6 3 Appendix C MODE and 6 3 Remote Control Programming C 2 Listening MODE SELECTION BUTTONS 6 3 Device Activation 00 C 2 Listening Mode Deecriptions a banni 6 4 Macro Operations s s L n C 3 Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions 6 39 Remote Programming C 4 Mode Paramete
8. AUTO DISTANCES SPEAKER FRONT LEFT SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE om C w SIDE RIGHT 0 0ft REAR RIGHT 0 0ft 1 SPEAKER 0 0 UNABLE CALCULATE SIDE LEFT UM SUB MONO SPEAKER MAY NOT BE ACCURATE AUTO DISTANCES I SPEAKER APPLIED gt b AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS CAUTION PLACE MICROPHONES AROUND PREFERRED LISTENING POSITIONS SIT QUIETLY COUNTDOWN SETTING LEVELS FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 00B 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB and selected speaker AUTO LEVELS FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SET LEVELS AUTO LEVELS ORIGINAL LEVELS REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER AUTO SPEAKER SETUP HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR PRESS TO BEGIN ERROR 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB AUTO SPEAKER SETUP TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS gt TO SKIP COUNTDOWN The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the individual calibration results for each speaker Press the arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter Then press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW AUTO LEVELS ai APP
9. MICROPHONE OUT OF RANGE The microphone level is more than 20dB below the highest microphone level Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the RV 8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers Refer to the micro phone placement examples that begin on page 3 38 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for the microphone check The microphone may be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance MICROPHONE TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE The microphone level could not be determined because of excessve room noise in the listening space Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space including conversations air conditioners and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows The microphone may be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired automatic calibration results placement determines whether the RV 8 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output levels for a single listening position several listening positions in a single row or several listening positions in the listening space Refer to the microphone placement examples that b
10. gt ESI EGY gt Thx serur KAA A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rear speakers optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening modes To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing it is recom mended that you configure a 7 channel speaker setup in which the rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the listening space The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5 1 THX ULTRA2 5 1 THX MUSIC DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is activated Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear speakers is less than 1 foot 0 3m Select the CLOSE setting if the distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot 0 3m but less than 4 feet 1 2m Select the APART setting if the distance between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet 1 2m Note ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers are present When the remote control 7 5 button is used to toggle between 7 and 5 channel playback ASA processing is not available during 5 channel playback RV 8 automatically switches between the 5 1 THX ULTRA2 and 5 1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes 3 35 Setup Lexicon AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION The RV 8 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances output level or both The table below indicates available automatic calibration options A successful micropho
11. 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO Cotes FILM Emesri MUSIC 5 1a a FILM 5 1a si MUSIC 5 1 mz 5 1a MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL MODE ADJUST 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS HEADPHONE 181 HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE E HEADPHONE 5 1a LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE MODE ADJUST Selecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu which is used to select a listening mode for adjustment When the MODE ADJUST menu opens the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode for the current Main Zone input source Rather selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu which is used to customize the selected listening mode These adjustments are applied when the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in the Listening Mode Activation section that begins below LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION Listening modes are available for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES MIC and analog input sources The RV 8 allows listening mode selection for all Main Zone sources In some cases the RV 8 automatically activates a listening mode in response to certain commands For this reason it is important to understand the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs Note When headphones are plugged into the RV 8 all listening modes are downmixed to two channels wi
12. AUDIO CONTROLS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS AUDIO CONTROLS BASS TREBLE TILT EQ L lt BALANCE gt R MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS AUDIO CONTROLS BASS TREBLE TILT EQ L lt ZONE BALANCE gt R i LOUDNESS SETUP BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE ZONE2 BALANCE AUDIO CONTROLS L lt lt gt gt R Controls the left to right balance of the Main Zone audio output connectors FADER B lt q gt gt F gt Controls the front to back balance of the Main Zone audio output connectors LOUDNESS BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE ZONE2 BALANCE SETUP ZONE2 BALANCE Controls the left to right balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors L lt q gt gt R ZONE3 BALANCE 7 Controls the left to right balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors L lt q gt gt R 9 Tuner Presets Tuner Presets 0 22 00 einer terrenis 5 2 Tuner Presets Lexicon TUNER PRESETS Selecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets The preset number preset name if available frequency and broadcast band is displayed MAIN MENU TUNER PRESETS MODE ADJUST PAGE 1 AUDIO CONTROLS PAGE 2 TUNER PRESETS PAGE 3 SETUP PAGE 4
13. Adjust Lexicon 5 1 MONO SURR This listening mode designed for playback of Dolby Digital encoded mono sources sends mono signalsto all channels Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1 MONO ELE This listening mode designed for playback of Dolby Digital encoded mono sources sends mono signals to the center channel and subwoofer Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 24 RV 8 Mode Adjust DTS ES DECODING The DTS DTS ES and DTS ES Discr listening modes are designed for at a minimum playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES and 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES sources The DTS DTS ES and DTS ES Discr listening mode names differ depending on the encoding present in the input source the DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup DTS ES listening modes are available when DTS ES decoding is activated The table at the bottom of the page showsthe conditions for the behavior of DTS ES decoding when it is activated DTS ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO an
14. FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1a THX UL2Cin 5 1a THX SurEX amp 5 1a THX os o The 5 1a THX UL2Cin 5 1a THX SurEX and 5 1a THX listening modes are desgned to convert 5 1 channel analog film sources that lack THX Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio The modes also allow 5 1 channel analog sources to use bass manage ment speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and audio controls tone controls The 5 1a THX UL2Cin 5 1a THX SurEX and 5 1a THX listening modes are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers These modes apply THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie the aters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding p
15. See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Note The THX MUSIC listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources Activate this listening mode with the front panel or remote control Mode arrow buttons When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automat ically activate a THX MUSIC listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present Adjust Lexicon 5 1 PLIIx MOV gt The 5 1 PLIIx MOV MOVIE listening mode is designed to play back 7 1 discrete channels decoded from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital film sources The seven main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz The 5 1 MOV listening modeis only available when the front side and rear speakers are present Note The RV 8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital input sources Activating the 5 1 PLIIx MOV listening mode The 5 1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital film sources To activate this listening mode use the front panel or remote control Mode buttons When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automatically ac
16. Appendix Installation 00 2 1 1 D 2 Appendix D INSTALLATION WORKSHEET Lexicon INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV CD TUNER PHONO NAME DIGITAL IN ANALOG IN ANLG IN LVL VIDEO IN COMPONENT IN 2 CH DOD dts 5 1 MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT ANLG BYP S VIDEO 16 9 S VIDEO 4 3 OSD COMPONENT OSD LEGACY VIDEO ZONE2 IN ZONE2 ADVANCED ANLG IN LVL DIGITAL BYPASS DIG OUT RATE RECORD D 2 Appendix D RV 8 SPEAKER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION FRONT LEFT RIGHT THX 80Hz CENTER THX 80Hz SIDE LEFT RIGHT THX 80Hz REAR LEFT RIGHT SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz THX ULTRA2SUB BGC ASA UNITS BASS PEAK LIMITERS CAL NOISE SUB LIMITER LIMIT ADJ CONFIG SETTINGS Analog Inputs Amplifier Outputs 8 STEREO INPUTS 5 ST amp 1 5 1 ANLG 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG MAIN 7 1 MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE2 2 0 MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE3 2 0 D 3 Appendix D Lexicon INSTALLATION WORKSHEET continued DISPLAY SETUP TRIGGER SETUP TUNER SETUP ON SCREEN DISPL
17. 34 History dependent When a menu is open closes the menu structure When no menus are open shows the 2 line status 35 History dependent Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save load presets when the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input 36 History dependent If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input toggles between AM FM frequency bands 37 History dependent If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input pressing this button will save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot Also use this button when programming the remote See page C 4 for additional information 38 History dependent Macro Buttons M 1 isfor Macro 1 M2 isfor Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3 See page C 9 for additional information on how to use and program macros 39 History dependent Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD screen for easier visibility History dependent buttons perform different functions depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device 2 26 RV 8 Basic Operation e w e 33 When a menu is open closes the menu and in most cases opens the previous menu Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the
18. Dynamic Listening Mode Selection Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain condi tions For example many of the dynamic modes are only available when the RV 8 is configured for seven main output channels and source material with specific encoding is played All dynamic listening modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode button See Dynamic Listening Modes on page 3 13 for a complete listing of dynamic listening modes LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONS The remote control listening mode selection buttons can be used to activate the Logic 7 Film Dolby DTS ES THX Logic 7 Music or Logic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone input source For instance if the L7 button is pressed while a 2 channel source is present the L7 FILM listening mode is activated The table below indicates the listening modes associated with each mode family selection button Button 2 Channel Dolby Digital DTS ES 5 1 Sources Sources Sources Sources 7 L7 FILM 5 1 L7 FILM DTS ES L7 FILM 5 1a L7 FILM L7 M L7 MUSIC 5 1 L7 MUSIC DTS ES L7 MUSIC 5 1a L7 MUSIC L7 TV L7 TV 5 1 L7 TV MODE SELECTION N A NOT AVAILABLE L7 MS L7 MUSIC 5 1 L7 MUSIC DTS ES L7 MUSIC N A SURROUND DOLBY DOLBY PLIIX MOV DD 5 1 PLIIxMOV MODE SELECTION N A NOT AVAILABLE DTS DTS NEO 6 CIN MODE SELECTION DTS ES N A NOT AVAILABLE THX DOLBY PLIIx THX THX UL2CIN DTS THX 5 1a THX Sur DTS TH
19. HIGH AUCIOIEEVELS LOCK OPTIONS 00s 1 LIVE CALIBRATION M I POWER MANAGEMENT 4 75 to 120dB ON OFF oos CAL NOISE ON OFF E OPER ETE gt ETE gt ESE gt CALNOISE ON ON OFF LIMITER ON ON OFF Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or LIMIT AD 100dB 75 to 120dB external calibration source To set the CAL NOISE parameter Note Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set bass peak limiters Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether output levels are automatically or manually calibrated Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requires an extemal calibration source such as an audio calibration disc 3 58 RV 8 Setup LIMITER ON OFF Eat gt EE mA BS gt LIMITER Limits low frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to other speakers To set the LIMITER parameter Select ON to restrict the output level of the low frequency signals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting LIMIT ADJ 75 to 120dB E373 gt Ete gt I muxo BIXUE LIMITER ADJ Sets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which low
20. MASTER LEVEL 5 to 5dB ms MIDRT 24ms to 48 6s PANORAMA ON OFF PRE DELAY 10 to 100ms RE EQUALIZER ON OFF REAR DLY OFFSET SPEECH DETECT OFF 1 to 30ms 4 to 20 or 30ms REAR L R OFF 30 to 12dB SOUND STAGE FRONT NEUTRAL REAR SOURCE ON OFF SUB LEVEL OFF 30 to 12dB SUB L R LVL PRESS RIGHT gt TO RESTORE MODE ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF SIDE L R OFF 30 to 12dB RIGHT LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT SPEAKER ANGLE 10 to 90deg OFF 30 to 12dB SURR ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF SURROUND DLY 0 to 15ms p SURROUND EX AUTO ON OFF SURROUND MIX 5 to 5dB VOCAL ENHANCE 6 0dB 3 0dB 0 0dB B 1 RV 8 Appendix B MAIN MENU RESTORE DEFAULTS FACTORY SETTINGS FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT HAVE BEEN RESTORED RESTORE DEFAULTS PRESS ANY KEY TO RESTART STATUS MENUS 2 STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE STATUS dits CREE VLU PG2 5 1a STATUS INPUT WORD LENGTH INPUT MODE SAMPLE RATE MODE CHANNELS INPUT TYPE BIT RATE SAMPLE RAT
21. dts 5 1 5 1a W FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ZONE2 ADVANCED DIGITAL DVD1 2 CH MODE tei FILM TV tei MUSIC 15i MUSIC SURR MOVIE TAPUI MUSIC DOPL DEIPRO LOGIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO HEADPHONE USE LAST Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the cor responding menu shown below These menus are identical regardless of which input is selected 5 1 tj MUSIC THX DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO HEADPHONE 5 1 USE LAST DVD1 MODE 4 E Cities 2 CHAN HEADPHONE 1 USE LAST DVD1 5 1a MODE 5 1a WI FILM 5 1a IMUSIC 5 1a THX 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL HEADPHONE 5 1a USE LAST DVD1 MIC MODE LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE USE LAST mae e AUTO OFF DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO DVD1 MAIN ADV INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG BYPASS OFF AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON COMPONENT OSD LEGACY VIDEO FORMAT DETECT NORMAL NORMAL FAST ON OFF DVD1 ZONE2 ADV ANLG IN LVL DIGITAL BYPASS OFF DIG OUT RATE 44 1kHz RECORD ENABLED BLOCKED ENABLED 18 to 12dB 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz ON OFF B 4 RV 8 Appendix B SETUP MENU SPEAKERS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS
22. lt 1 2 34 STATUS Menu Level 2 35 Basic Operation Lexicon FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW The RV 8 is shown below The numbers in the front panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text 15 et Ru T M 2 2 RV 8 Basic Operation 1 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Use the front panel display to view the current input listening mode input source and volume level If the built in tuner is active the display will show the frequency band listening mode and volume level The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display for messages and menus one line at a time Note Power is still supplied to the RV 8 when standby mode is activated 2 IR RECEIVER The IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV 8 remote control There are three associated LEDs e amber LED blinks when a remote control command is received The red LED lights when the A D converters are overloading The blue LED lights when the RV 8 is powered and activated even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF Red LED Blue LED Amber LED 3 VOLUME KNOB Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones To adjust the Main Zone volume level Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase n VOLUME 34db or counterclockwise to decrease volume level in 1dB incre
23. Lexicon INPUT SETUP Em gt Eu gt Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input e g DVD1 Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu which is used to change the input name assign audio and video input connectors select preferred listening modes and configure advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH Isi FILM 000 5 1 FILM de 5E SET HT 5 1a 5 1a I FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section Whenever it appears any other INPUT SETUP menu can be substituted Likewise whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path any other input can be substituted All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A 6 The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input is selected The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable Default parameter settings differ from input to input The INP
24. TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS 1 VOLUME CONTROLS 1 TRIGGER 1 TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION T POWER MANAGEMENT Pu 1 1 1 1 USA EUROPE mr JAPAN i E EUR 1 HIGH MED LOW TUNER SETUP Seas REGION AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTOFREQUENCY ON 1 FAST gt MEDIUM SLOW PRESET NAME e RDS NAME FREQUENCY SETUP MENU LIVE CALIBRATION MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT LIVE CALIBRATION CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLY PRESS gt TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN LIVE CALIBRATION PRESS RIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD PRESS RIGHT TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4 gt ON OFF TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS TO SKIP COUNTDOWN LIVE CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT r P r ee LIVE CALIBRATION CALIBRATION DONE PRESS gt TO CONTINUE LIVE CALIBRATION SIGNAL TOO LOW PRESS gt TO CONTINUE B 11 Appendix Lexicon MAIN MENU TUNER PRESETS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO
25. UT i LH L NANI RENI s Css R 50 100 200 5k 10k 20k The BASS parameter controls the amount of low frequency boost or cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center and Sub TREBLE Parameter Settings 5k 10k 20k The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high frequency boost or cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R and Center 4 3 Audio Controls Lexicon AUDIO CONTROLS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS AUDIO CONTROLS 3 0 to 3 0dB TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS TUNER PRESETS SETUP BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE ZONE3 BALANCE TILT EQ AUDIO CONTROLS gt Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center and Sub This parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a hinge point at 1kHz As the setting increases frequencies higher than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously cut As the setting decreases frequencies higher than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously boosted The TILT EQ Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ parameter settings 3 0dB to 43 0dB MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS AUDIO CONTROLS gt ON BASS OFF
26. When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from 5 1 channel analog sources The 5 1a THX listening mode The 5 1a THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2 nor THX Surround EX decoding is active Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SURROUND EX OFF ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 31 Adjust Lexicon 5 1a THX MUSIC gt The 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel analog music sources It cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are present This mode performs best in home theaters where the rear speaker are placed close together ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 35 for more informa tion Possible Settings 10 0 to 40 0dB Option Parameter Default Setting LFE MIX 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Note The 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front panel or remote control Mode buttons 5 la STANDARD This mode al
27. menus without saving vates the RT 10 or parameter in 5dB the changes RT 20 rear panel video increments output connectors 10 Selects the TV input for Increases the AUDIO Activates the RT 10 or Controls the brightness Zone 3 CONTROLS menu RT 20 display mode of front panel display TREBLE parameter in characters 5dB increments 11 Selects the CD input for Increases the AUDIO Opens the RT 10 or Activates the RT 10 or Zone 3 CONTROLS menu Main RT 20 Subtitle bar RT 20 search mode Zone TILT EQ parameter level in 2dB increments 12 Selectsthe Phono input Activates the AUDIO Opens the RT 10 or Activates the RT 10 or for Zone 3 CONTROLS menu Main RT 20 Audio bar RT 20 program mode Zone LOUDNESS parameter 13 Displays Zone 3 Page2 Displays Zone Page1 Displays DVD1 Page2 Displays DVD1 Page 1 command bank command bank command bank command bank 14 Displays the Home command bank 15 Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages 16 Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments Increases RV 8 Main volume level in 1dB increments 2 21 Basic Operation Lexicon 17 History dependent Decreases Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB increments 18 Y p History dependent Toggles between fully muting Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu BALANCE and FADER parameter
28. 3 36 Bass Peak Limiters 3 58 manual 3 55 P PANORAMA listening mode 6 13 PANORAMA parameter 6 8 6 43 parameter drop down menus 2 16 parameter relationships 6 47 parameters listening mode menu 6 39 STATUS menu 2 34 parameters preferred listening mode selection 3 12 phono input connectors 2 8 POWER MANAGEM ENT menu 3 3 power switch 2 9 PRE DELAY parameter 6 11 6 12 6 43 preferred listening mode selection 3 14 Preferred listening modes 3 12 PRESET NAME option 3 76 product registration 1 5 program operation parameters 3 71 programming macro buttons C 10 cloning the remote control C 15 editing text on buttons C 13 erasing favorite channel C 13 erasing learned buttons C 14 erasing macro functions C 12 C 13 erasing punch through functions C 13 programming backlight C 15 punch through functions C 12 recalling preprogrammed numbers C 14 sample sequence C 11 R RADIO TEXT parameter 3 77 RDS NAME option 3 76 REAR DLY OFFSET parameter 6 4 6 5 6 13 6 16 6 17 6 26 6 29 6 30 6 43 Rear L R output connector 2 7 REAR L R parameter 3 29 3 32 6 37 6 44 rear panel overview 2 6 RV 8 2 6 recalling zone audio codes C 16 RECORD parameter 3 23 3 24 RE EQUALIZER parameter 6 4 6 6 6 9 6 10 6 16 6 17 6 19 6 26 6 27 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 43 REGION parameter 3 72 remote control battery installation 1 6 buttons 2 17 command matrix 2 18 2 18 operation considerations 2 14
29. 3 9 3 10 manual speaker distance calibration 3 54 MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu 3 53 MASTER LEVEL parameter 6 23 6 29 6 33 6 43 MAX VOLUME parameter 3 69 menu arrow buttons 2 15 menu item selection 2 15 menu navigation 2 15 menu options 2 16 Menu tree B 2 MIC MODE menu 3 16 MIC parameter 3 12 MICROPHONE CHECK option 3 36 microphone input connectors 2 8 microphones automatic calibration 3 42 3 48 checking 3 40 connecting 3 37 3 80 improper positioning 3 39 3 46 3 47 3 82 placement 3 42 proper positioning 3 38 3 43 3 44 3 45 3 81 MID RT parameter 6 12 6 43 MIX ROOM parameter 2 35 MODE ADJUST menu 6 2 mode buttons 2 4 MODE parameter 2 35 MONO listening mode 6 16 MONO LOGIC listening mode 6 15 MONO SURROUND listening mode 6 16 Mute button 2 5 MUTE LEVEL parameter 3 68 N NAME parameter 3 5 naming presets 2 11 NIGHTCLUB listening mode 6 11 0 Off buttons 2 5 2 5 on screen display BACKGROUND parameter 3 65 FORMAT parameter 3 65 POSITION parameter 3 65 STATUS parameter 3 64 ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu 3 64 D 4 ON SCREEN DISPLAY parameter 3 63 output connectors audio 2 8 2 9 trigger 2 8 video 2 7 OUTPUT LEVELS menu 6 37 OUTPUT LEVELS parameter 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 l 3 Index Lexicon 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 43 Output levels calibrating automatic
30. 5 The remote will be flashing FROM TABLE at the bottom of the LCD screen Select the device from which to accessthe code table Note When using the Preprogramming method always use the appropriate button as shown in the column when asked FROM TABLE The labels of the buttons may have been changed but the codes are in the positons as shown to the left For example the AUDIO Code table will always be the top left button The CD Code table will always be the fourth button down on the right side of the LCD screen etc Use DVD2 not DVD1 to access the DVD code library DVD1 has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT 10 Disc Player The remote will be flashing ENTER NUM BER Refer to the tables starting on page C 18 and find the manufacturer brand of your device If programming the remote for the TV device find the TV s device code table and so on Point the remote control toward the device and enter the first three digit code number selected for your device There is no way of knowing which code isthe one that will have the functions that more closely match your device than the others so it is wise to try them all See step 9 on the next page Enter the code number within 20 seconds of beginning the programming otherwise the remote will revert to the SETUP menu and then after a period of time it will go back to the MAIN device page If there is more than one code number assigned to your brand try one code numbe
31. 6dB BOdB to 40dB EARLY RFLX LVL 14dB 80dB to 12dB BASS XOVER 156H 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF 7 2 9kHz 2 BASS XOVER 156 2 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF SHAPE 2 0 to 4 SHAPE 2 0 to 4 SPREAD 25 0 to 100 SIZE 30 SPREAD 2896 096 to 10096 m m B SIZE 38m 4m to 60m See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 36 RV 8 Mode Adjust OUTPUT LEVELS MODE ADJUUST gt EUG TEES Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu which is used to adjust output levels for the Main CENTER SIDE UR Zone audio output connectors labeled UR Center Subwoofer Side L R and Rear L R UB The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate multichannel output signals Instead an output specific parameter appears For example the MONO listening mode menu includes a SUB LVL parameter Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB SIDEL R 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB REAR L R 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB SUB 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions CUSTOM gt UU gt Opens the CUSTOM menu which can be used to compare custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode CUSTOM VS P
32. 8 STEREO INPUTS OR 5ST amp 1 5 1 ANLG a OR AMP OUTPUTS 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG MAIN 7 1 MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE2 2 0 TRIGGER i MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE3 2 0 8 STEREO INPUTS i TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT FOR REAR PANEL CFG 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG FOR REAR PANEL CFG 5ST amp 1 51ANLG FOR REAR PANEL CFG SETUP MENU DISPLAYS MAIN MENU SETUP b DISPLAY SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS ON SCREEN DISPLAY AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG BLUES USE M OFF SETUP DISPLAYS r CUSTOM NAME OFF ON SCREEN DISPLAY EDIT CUSTOM NAME FRONT PANEL DISPLAY STATUS ALWAYSON BRIGHTNESS 100 g FRONT PANEL DISPLAY 100 VOLUME CONTROLS 1 1 1 1 rd ud o eee 1 Il 2 SECOND TRIGGER I UD d e i TUNER SETUP 1 EDIT CUSTOM NAME 20 i LOCK OPTIONS RV 8 I 1 254 LIVE CALIBRATION ri lt ACKGROUND i i I I F 1 BUTTONS TO EDIT a ALWAYSON 1 UP TO 20 CHARACTERS ON l 2 SECONDS 1 BUTTON TO ADVANCE OFF 1 ALWAYS OFF I OFE 1 to 60ms 1 L gt CENTER BOTTOM OFF SECAM PAL NTSC B 10 Appendix RV 8 SETUP MENU TUNER SETUP MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS
33. AUDIO CONTROLS TREBLE MATA 1 TUNER PRESETS TILT EQ SETUP LOUDNESS 1 BALANCE lt l gt i FADER Y Y Y L lt BALANCE gt sm MANES FADER ON 3 0 to 3 0dB 6 0 to 6 0dB c ZONE3 BALANCE lt l gt OFF Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings BASS 6 0dB to 46 0dB BASS 30 0dB 6 0 to 46 0dB gt E TREBLE 0 0dB 6 0 to 6 0dB Controls the amount of low frequency boost or cut applied to the TILT EQ 40 0dB 3 0 to 43 0dB 2 mus AUR 54 a e and ubwoofer The arameter ings graph on the next page LOUDNESS OFF ON OFF indicates the frequency response of all BASS parameter settings BALANCE lt gt L lt to q gt to gt R FADER lt gt B lt to q gt to gt F TREBLE 6 0dB to 46 0dB ZONE2 BALANCE lt gt L to q gt to gt R gt ZONE3 BALANCE lt gt L lt to 4 to gt Controls the amount of high frequency boost or cut applied to the Note When LIVE is active the BASS TREBLE TILT EQ and LOUDNESS controls do not function and the corresponding parameters in the AUDIO CONTROLS menu default to 0 0dB The LOUDNESS parameter defaults to OFF Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R and Center The TREBLE Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response of all TREBLE parameter settings 4 2 RV 8 Audio Controls BASS Parameter Settings
34. Appendix Lexicon SAT SAT Manufacturer Codes Manufacturer Codes ALPHASTAR 123 PHILIPS 071 152 153 AMPLICA 050 PL 023 026 BIRDVIEW 129 113 051 126 PRESIDENT 019 102 BSR 053 PRIM ESTAR 110 030 CAPETRONICS 053 PROSAT 072 CHANNEL MASTER 013 014 015 018 036 055 PROSCAN 151 106 150 CHAPARRAL 008 009 012 077 RCA 151 106 150 CITOH 054 REALISTIC 043 074 CURTIS MATHES 050 SAMSUNG 123 DRAKE 005 006 007 010 011 112 116 141 052 SATELLITE SERMCE 028 035 047 085 DX ANTENNA 024 046 056 076 SONY 103 ECHOSTAR 038 040 057 058 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 122 STARCAST 041 089 SUPERGUIDE 020 124 125 EURGSAT 114 TEECOM 023 026 075 087 088 090 107 130 137 FUJITSU 017 021 022 027 133 134 TOSHIBA 002 127 GENERAL ELECTRIC 151 106 150 TOWN amp COUNTRY 023 026 GENERALINSTRUMENT 003 004 016 029 031 059 101 148 UNIDEN 016 025 042 043 044 045 048 049 078 079 080 086 101 HITACHI 139 140 135 136 HOME CABLE 080 044 029 VIEWSTAR 115 HOUSTON TRACKER 033 037 039 104 057 051 WINEGARD 128 146 HUGHES 068 154 ZENITH 081 082 083 084 091 120 HYTEK 053 HYUNDAI 149 ICR 023 JANIEL 060 147 KATHREIN 108 LEGEND 057 LUTRON 132 LUXOR 144 062 MACOM 010 059 063 064 065 MEMOREX 057 NEXTWAVE 028 124 125 NORSAT 069 070 PACE 143 PANASONIC 142 060 PANSAT 121 PERSONAL CABLE 117 C 20 RV 8 Appendix C VCR VCR Manufacturer Codes Manufacturer Codes AIWA 034 161 MAGNAVOX 031 034 041 067 068 156 164 AKAI 016 043 046 124 125 146
35. CUSTOM II PLII MOVIE OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM TI PUI MUSIC PANORAMA OFF CTR WIDTH DIMENSION NEUTRAL SURROUND DLY 10ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM II PL RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM LOGIC OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM ONEN E RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CIN OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM dits E MUSIC OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM NIGHTCLUB CENTER DEPTH 11 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 5 LIVENESS 196ms PRE DELAY 5ms ROLLOFF 9 0kHz EFFECT LVL 3dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CONCERT HALL CENTER DEPTH 12 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 20m LIVENESS 1 72ms PRE DELAY OFF ROLLOFF 2 4kHz EFFECT LVL 2dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CHURCH CENTER DEPTH 5 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 20m MID RT 1 56s BASS RT 1 87s PRE DELAY 24ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz EFFECT LVL 3dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM CATHEDRAL CENTER DEPTH 12 SPEECH DETECT ON SIZE 30m MID RT 3 725 BASS RT 4 475 PRE DELAY 23ms ROLLOFF 3 1kHz EFFECT LVL 8dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM PANORAMA EFFECT LVL 4dB BASS CONTENT STEREO LOW FREQ WIDTH 0 SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms INPUT BALANCE lt l gt CALIBRATION OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 2 CH SURROUND OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 2 CHANNEL SUB LEVEL 0dB CUSTOM MONO LOGIC EFFECT LVL 9dB ACADM Y FILTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM MONO SURROUND OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM MONO SUB LVL CUSTOM B 13 Appendix Lexicon MAIN MENU
36. DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES film sources The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 40 0dB 46 0dB 3 0dB 40 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLO FF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions DTS ES L7 MUSIC amp DTS L7 MUSIC or EXE These proprietary Lexicon listening modes similar to the DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode use an advanced matrix to decode seven channels from 5 1 and 6 1 channel music sources with enhanced front steering to provide remarkable sound improvement compared to other decoders The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES music sources The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setups Option Parameter Default Setting Possible S
37. Each tuner preset page TUNER PRESETS EDIT PRESET 1 STATION 0 00FM FREQUENCY 0 00 LOADED 0 00FM BAND FM 0 00FM EDIT STATION NAME 0 00FM LISTEN TO PRESET 0 00FM NAME 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT 0 00FM CLEAR PRESET UP TO 8 CHARACTERS 0 00FM BUTTON TO ADVANCE 0 00FM I a PRESS MENU gt 0 00FM TO CLEAR PRESET allows up to 10 preset stations In the US each preset channel is identified by the station s call letters or what their broadcast information identifies as the call letters In Europe and Japan each preset channel is identified by the station s Program Service PS name If RDS information is not available then the Preset name will be Preset XX where XX is the listed number location in the Preset menu for that position For example if Preset 401 is FM 90 90 and the call letters are WABC then the name for that position is WABC To edit a preset press the menu arrows until the desired preset is highlighted then press the menu arrow to open the parameters menu for the selected preset Parameter LISTEN TO PRESET NAME CLEAR PRESET 5 2 RV 8 Tuner Presets LISTEN TO PRESET Loads the current preset station Press the menu arrow to load the station preset The front panel and on screen display will display STATION LOADED NAME EX gt Eri Edits the station name The station name can be up to 8 charac
38. If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input press 4 4 once to tune to the next available tuner frequency Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode which 26 History dependent searches for the next available radio station To enter Scan Mode press and hold until the display shows 4 SCAN or SCAN gt 27 History dependent When a DTS ES source is present toggles the ES decoding parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings 2 8 History dependent Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1 29 History dependent Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present 30 History dependent When a menu is open scrolls upward through menu items 31 History dependent Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item which opens another menu opens a parameter drop down menu or selects the highlighted parameter setting 32 History dependent When a menu is open scrolls downward through menu items History dependent buttons perform different functions depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device 2 24 RV 8 Basic Operation ap 0 o 5 4 o 8 9 000 98 LOLI 11111 25 If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently When 10 or RT 20 playback
39. OFF SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1a L7 FILM gt TITI The 5 1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon lis tening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channels from 5 1 channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering This listening mode allows 5 1 channel analog sources to use bass management speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and audio controls tone controls Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB 46 0dB 3 0dB 0 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1to 30ms LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 29 Adjust Lexicon 5 1a L7 MUSIC The 5 1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5 1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode but specifically tailored for music sources This mode is designed and recommended for playback of 5 1 channel analog music sources Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB 46 0dB 3 0dB 40 0dB
40. RESTORE DEFAULT NAME PRESS MENU RESTORE INPUT RESTORE DEFAULT NAME EY gt I gt EX Restores the factory default name of the selected input Factory default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection button labels To restore the factory default name of the selected input 1 Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the INPUT NAME menu When the INPUT NAME menu opens press the remote control 4 and arrow buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted press the arrow button to select this option The message PRESS MENU gt TO RESTORE INPUT NAME appears in the on screen and front panel displays When this message appears press the arrow button to restore the factory default name of the selected input and close the message Press the arrow button to close the message without restoring the factory default name of the selected input RV 8 Setup ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS The RV 8 has eight configurable inputs each of which can be assigned to its eight digital audio eight analog audio the built in tuner the phono input five composite video five S Video or three component video input connectors MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 INPUT SETUP b DVD1 DIGITALIN DVD1 DVD1 COAX 1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS
41. SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 5 Adjust Lexicon DOLBY PLIIx THX amp DOLBY PLII THX gt ETE on gt EEE Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6 1 or 7 1 channel six or seven speakers and a subwoofer surround sound from any native two channel stereo or 5 1 channel source The modes are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers Dolby PLII x THX encoding Applies THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front side and rear speakers are present The PLII listening mode is available when the front and side speakers are present Activating the DOLBY PLIIx THX listening mode The DOLBY PLIIx THX listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode f
42. Selects the Scan Sensitivity parameter which can be used to set the threshold the system will use to tune to a new station The default setting is LOW sensitivity only the strongest station frequencies will tune If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations try the MED medium or HIGH settings LOW MED HIGH TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTS REGION FM LO LIMIT FM HI LIMIT FM INCREM ENT AM LO LIMIT AM HI LIMIT AM INCREMENT USA 87 90MHZ 107 90MHZ 200 KHZ 2M HZ 520KHZ 1720KHZ 10KHZ EUROPE 87 50M HZ 108 00M HZ 50KHZ 05MHZ 520KHZ 1602KHZ 9KHZ JAPAN 76 00M HZ 91 00M HZ 50KHZ 05MHZ 522KHZ 1720KHZ 9KHZ E EUR 64 00M HZ 76 00M HZ 50KHZ 05MHZ 520KHZ 1720KHZ 9KHZ 3 73 Setup Lexicon TUNER SETUP continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT AUTOLOAD EX gt Automatically scans and stores presets for the currently selected frequency band To select the AUTOLOAD option highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNER SETUP menu and press the right arrow The message PRESS RIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD appears in the on screen and front panel displays To cancel the AUTOLOAD command press the left 4 arrow AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and uses the next available pr
43. Subwoofer 3 46 RV 8 Setup IM PRO PER microphone positioning for automatic calibration During the automatic calibration do not X Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of the listening positions or space Position the microphones at spots where the listeners heads will not be during listening Obstruct the line of sght path between the microphones and the speakers Position the microphones on the floor on seat cushions or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals Position the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet 9 14m from any one speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check The microphones are positioned on seat cushions rather than in spots where the listener s heads will be during listening Microphone 3 47 Setup Lexicon PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS PLACE MICROPHONES AROUND PREFERRED LISTENING POSITIONS
44. e m x 11111 REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS N 7c PPP E N P 15 16 17 18 SYSTEM POWER OFF Displays the name of the selected device POWER ON Device and function buttons Light Displays page number currently selected device LCD page change FAVORITE HOM E menu CHANNEL Listening Mode 47 Previous channel VOLUME 47 MUTE TRANSPORT functions PLAY STOP REWIND PAUSE REC SKIP and FF for VCR DVD and CD JOYSTICK left right up down and center press DISPLAY AM FM ENTER SAVE MACRO buttons 2 17 Basic Operation Lexicon COMMAND MATRIX The command matrix describes the commands that the remote control buttons perform when each command bank is active eo 1 Enters RV 8 standby mode 21 Activates the RV 8 Displaysthe MAIN Zone Displaysthe Selects the Dolby Displays the Zone 2 Toggles RV8 between command bank which Main Zone Digital listening Status 5 speaker and 7 includes commands Status mode family speaker modes that control the Main Zone Displays the Zone 2 Deactivatesthe Selects the DTS Deactivates Zone 2 Adjusts the AUDIO command bank which Main Zone listening mode CONTROLS menu includes commands that family Main Zone BALANCE control Zone 2 to the left Displays the Zone 3 Selectsthe Tuner Selects the THX Selectsthe Tuner Set
45. frequency signals are redirected To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter 1 Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter The parameter initially sets to 75dB 2 Pressthe and arrow buttons to change the parameter value The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITER parameter is set to ON 3 59 Setup Lexicon I O CONFIG The I O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight Left Right stereo connectors five Left Right stereo connectors and one 5 1 channel configuration Front L R Center Subwoofer Side L R or as two stereo connectors and two 5 1 channel configurations MAIN MENU SETUP 1 0 CONFIG REAR PANEL CONFIG MODE ADJUST INPUTS ANALOG INPUTS 8 STEREO INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS AMP OUTPUTS OR TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG 5 ST amp 1 5 1 ANLG SETUP DISPLAYS OR VOLUME CONTROLS 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT 8 STEREO INPUTS Ex Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio Al analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo connectors input connectors as eight stereo connectors When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected The 5 1 channel connectors are not available Input sources that were assigned to the 5 1 ANLG 3 5 and 5 1 ANLG 6 8 are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3 and 6 respectively 3 60 RV 8 Setup 5 ST amp 1 5
46. it is possible to select an output level parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the next parameter causing the RV 8 to send the calibration noise signal to both speakers If this occurs reselect the desired speaker 4 When the horizontal bar graph opens press the or button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading from the primary listening position 5 Pres 4 to close the parameter The intemal noise test will continue and automatic scrolling will resume 6 Repeat steps 2 3 4 and 5 until all desired output levels have been set 3 56 RV 8 Setup EXTERNAL NOISE TEST EI gt gt ETE SERENE ELE Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3 55 which manually calibrates output levels The external noise test requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc When the external noise test is conducted the RV 8 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source Refer to the table below for more information about external noise test listening mode activation When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test all custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored The listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its factory default condition When the external noise test isfinished the
47. method described on page C 12 to put the RV 8 s volume control into the DVD device To adjust other functions of the RV 8 while staying in the DVD device use the leaming method described on page C 7 to add those functions to the DVD device such as Surround sound controls the receiver s DVD input code the TV s power code etc In that instance everything that is needed for watching a DVD on your TV without having to Switch back and forth from device to device is available All programming is done by first entering the SETUP mode in the remote control Press both the HOME and ENT enter buttons simultaneously for three seconds to access the SETUP mode shown below SETUP will be displayed at the top of the LCD screen Specific programming instructions begin on the next page P PRO LEARN FAV MACRO PUNCH RECAL ERASE EDIT LIGHT CLONE 992 v 9 qo LEY Y XS LOL RV 8 Appendix C USING PREPROGRAM M ED CODES To program the remote to make it compatible with other components 1 Manually power on the device to be operated 2 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds until SETUP appears at the top of the LCD screen 3 Pressthe P PRO button next to the LCD screen 4 The remote will be flashing SELECT BUTTON at the bottom of the LCD screen Press the button for the device you wish to program For example to program a TV press the TV button
48. use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as when a power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the appara tus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Refer to the manufacturer s operating instructions for power requirements Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use of different line cord and or attachment plug Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack or directly above heat producing equipment such as power amplifiers Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in the product specifi cation alerts you to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage inside the enclosure voltage that may be sufficient to constitute a risk of shock RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit s connectors This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation This equipmen
49. 1 ANLG Ez gt gt EEXENUESETIE Configures the analog audio input connectors as five stereo connectors and one 5 1 channel configuration When the analog audio input connectors are configured as five stereo and one 5 1 channel configuration The connectors labeled 1 2 3 4 and 5 are configured as stereo connectors Theconnectors labeled 6 7 and 8 are configured as a 5 1 channel connector This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table at the bottom of the next column Two channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5 1 channel connector labeled 5 1 ANLG 6 8 The 5 1 channel connectors should only be used with 5 1 channel analog sources such as DVD As and SACDs 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG EJ gt HSI gt BSE Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo connectors and two 5 1 channel configurations When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two stereo and two 5 1 channel connectors The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors The connectors labeled 3 4 and 5 are configured as a 5 1 channel connector and the connectors labeled 6 7 and 8 are configured as a 5 1 channel connector These connectors are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table at the bottom of this column 2 channel sources that were as
50. 44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the RV 8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection SPEAKER UNABLE TO CALCULATE The microphones did not detect calibra tion noise signals or the RV 8 could not calculate a value Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3 41 to 3 45 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the RV 8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH noise signals at an unusually high level SPEAKER One or more microphones did not detect Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3 41 to 3 45 to confirm that the MAY NOT BE ACCURATE calibration noise signals at a reasonable microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration level The calibrated value could be inac curate SPEAKER The microphones detected calibration Decrease associated amplifier volume levels including if applicable powered subwoofer amplifiers The microphones may be positioned too close within 2 feet 0 61m of the selected speaker Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3 41 to 3 45 to confirm th
51. 5 1 channel analog source the L input is sent to the FRONT L output The R input is sent to the FRONT R output The C input is sent to the center output The SUB input is sent to the SUB output The LS input is sent to the SIDE L and REAR L outputs The RS input is sent to the SIDE R and REAR R outputs When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF the unit routes the analog input signal through A D conversion This makes it possible to utilize internal processing including listening modes crossovers and equalization Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 provide multichannel outputs If the 5 1 channel analog input is selected for Zone 2 or Zone 3 only the front left and right L R inputs will be available When LIVE is the selected analog input the MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG and ANALOG BYPASS is disabled Note If the Main Zone source is 5 1 analog only the Front L R channels will be sent to the Zone 2 S PDIF outputs E373 IT gt Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some video sources When set to AUTO the RV 8 allows anamorphic video input signals to pass through the S Video switcher enabling compatible display devices to automatically switch between anamorphic and non anamorphic display modes When OFF the RV 8 prevents anamorphic video input signals from passing through the S Video switcher preventing compatible display devices from automatically
52. AUTO SPEAKER SETUP CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLY PRESS TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN TEST WILL BEGIN IN 10 PRESS TO SKIP COUNTDOWN AUTO SPEAKER SETUP POWER MANAGEMENT Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration DISTANCES DISTANCES amp LEVELS Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option as shown in the menu illustration above If a microphone check is successful the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on screen display Press the a arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want Then pressthe arrow button to select CHECK REQUIRED this option Refer to the table on page 3 36 for more information about automatic calibration options FOR AUTO CALIBRATION NO MICROPHONE DETECTED Ifa microphone check is unsuccessful one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on screen display indicat ing that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration and also the reason the previous check failed If this occurs go back to Connecting the Microphones on page 3 37 and work your way back to this page The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins The ICAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV 8 generates loud calibration noise signals dur
53. CHANNELS 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 0 BIT RATE 32 to 640kbps EX ENCODED MATRIX NONE SAM PLE RATE 48kHz 2 0 ENCODING MATRIX NONE DIALOG OFFSET 27 to 4dB MIX ROOM SMALL LARGE CENTER MIX LVL 3 0dB 4 5dB 6 0dB SURR MIX LVL 3 0dB 6 0dB See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information 001 0 STATUS PGi 00 D STATUS INPUT SAMPLE RATE MODE 2 0 ENCODING CHANNELS DIALOG OFFSET BIT RATE MIX ROOM EX ENCODED CENTER MIX LVL SURR MIX LVL 2 30 RV 8 Basic Operation Em STATUS Provides information about DTS ES input sources Includes L C R SL SR SB and LFE level meters The SB level meter appears when a 6 1 channel input source is present or when a 5 1 channel input source is present and the E5 DECODING parameter is set to ON Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode CHANNELS 3 3 1 3 2 1 BIT RATE 754 5 to 1509 7 kbps ES ENCODING DISCRETE MATRIX OFF WORD LENGTH 16 bits 20 bits 24 bits SAMPLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information dts UTWLSTATUS INPUT WORD LENGTH MODE SAMPLE RATE CHANNELS BIT RATE ENCODING dB L C R SL SR SB LFE 0 5 1 BYPASS STATUS Provides information about 5 1 channel analog input sources when the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON
54. CONCERT HALL CHURCH and CATHEDRAL SPREAD All LIVE modes SUB amp SUB LVL All except LIVE modes SURR ROLLOFF All L7 modes SURROUND DLY Dolby PUI MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC SURROUND EX THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX SURROUND MIX 5 1 2 CHANNEL and DTS ES 2 CHAN TREB CUT RT All LIVE modes VOCAL ENHANCE All L7 modes 6 49 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting 7 2 Routine Maintenance 0 1 2 66 7 4 Restoring Factory Default Settings 7 4 Troubleshooting and M aintenance Lexicon TROUBLESHOOTING The RV 8 does not power on 1 4 Make sure the rear panel power switch is set to the on position Attempt to power on the RV 8 with the front panel Standby button and remote control On button Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between the rear panel AC input connector and the wall outlet Check the electrical circuit and breaker The remote control does not work 1 Himinate obstructions between the remote control and the front panel IR receiver When the RV 8 is not using the rear panel IR IN connector the remote control must be in line of sight with the front panel IR receiver for proper operation The remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver Make
55. CONCERT HHALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 m FILM 5 184TV 5 1iMUSIC Tz MUSIC 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO 5 1a MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL MODE ADJUST 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS HEADPHONE 21 HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE E HEADPHONE 5 1a LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE tj FILM AUTO AZIMUTH ON VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON SOUND STAGE REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15 5 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM iTV AUTO AZIMUTH ON VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE REAR 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15 5 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM Iz MUSIC VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15 5 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 121 MUSIC SURR VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING MSURR SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKRENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO PLilx THX RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OO PLilx MOV OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM KI PLilx MUS PANORAMA OFF CTR WIDTH 3 DIMENSION NEUTRAL SURROUND DLY 10ms OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM PLI RE EQUALIZER OUTPUT LEVELS
56. DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 5m 4 to 20m LIVEN ESS 196ms 30ms to 20 2s PRE DELAY 5ms OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 9 0kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 43dB 12 to 46dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions CONCERT HALL The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends them to the front side and rear channels to simulate large listening spaces The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 20m 4 to 20m LIVENESS 1 72s 30msto 20 2s PRE DELAY OFF OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 2dB 12 to OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Adjust Lexicon CHURCH The CHURCH mode uses reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich smooth reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium listening spaces such as churches and chambers with long rever beration time relative to their sizes The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reve
57. DISTANCES amp LEVELS calibration is performed as a combined procedure 3 51 Setup Lexicon PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued Message Description Troubleshooting SPEAKER RV 8 successfully calibrated the value N A OK for the selected speaker without error SPEAKER The selected speaker is not present in the Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED speaker setup speaker in the speaker setup The RV 8 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in the speaker setup SIGNAL TOO LOW noise signals at an unusually low level SPEAKER The microphones detected out of phase Examine speaker associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE calibration noise signals but the cali Dipolar speakers could cause this error However the RV 8 does not report this error unless at brated value is still accurate least half of the microphones detect out of phase calibration noise signals Reflections from room objects could cause this error Drivers intentionally wired out of phase could cause this error SPEAKER The microphones detected calibration The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet 9 14m from the selected speaker or in a location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals Refer to the placement examples on pages 3 40 to 3
58. DISTANCES OK LEVELS ERROR AUTO VALUES APPLIED PRESS gt TO VIEW DETAILS AUTO DISTANCES FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to select speaker distances or levels 12 0ft 10 5ft 12 08 4 58 ERROR 6 0ft 4 58 1 Pressthe arrow button to return to the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen To select the other calibration procedure follow the instructions in Step 5 Otherwise press the button to retum to the SPEAKER SETUP menu Note The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown above as an example The AUTO LEVELS screen can be substituted SET LEVELS AUTO LEVELS AUTO LEVELS FRONT LEFT ORIGINAL LEVELS CENTER FRONT RIGHT rq R SR D SIDE RIGHT 0 008 B B REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT 2810 SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER SEE Di 0 098 0 098 Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the desired speaker levels 1 Press the arrow button to retum to the SET LEVELS menu Press the and arrow buttons to toggle between calibrated output levels AUTO and original output levels The speaker graphics at the bottom of the menu update to indicate the selected values e Pres the gt arrow button to apply the selected values A confirmation message is displayed to indicate the applied values Press the arrow button twice in suc cession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessible after the
59. DVD1 INPUT SETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 NAME DVD1 ANLG IN LVL 0dB AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DVD2 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 DIGITAL BYPASS OFF TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SAT ANALOG IN DIGOUT RATE 44 1kHz SETUP DISPLAYS VCR ANLGIN LVL AUTO RECORD ENABLED VOLUME CONTROLS VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 TRIGGER 9 COMPONENT IN TUNER SETUP TUNER LOCK OPTIONS PHONO LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED Parameter Possible Settings ANLG IN LVL 18 to 12dB ANLG IN LVL 18dB to 12dB gt Lud gt E gt DIGITAL BYPASS ON OFF Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent DIG OUT RATE 96kHz 88 2kHz 48kHz 44 1kHz to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors The RV 8 applies these RECORD BLOCKED ENABLED adjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors This parameter can be adjusted when an input source is present to prevent the intemal A D converter from overloading 3 23 Setup Lexicon DIGITAL BYPASS ON OFF gt Allows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording When ON is selected the RV 8 passes digital input signals directly to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors preserving the original format of the input signal This would be useful if you want to send a multichannel encoded signal to a second device for decoding When
60. Deactivates Zone 3 15 TUNE SEEK BUTTONS Allow for manual or automatic tuning of the AM FM stereo radio tuner 16 HEADPHONE OUTPUT Features multiple listening modes including LOGIC7 headphone processing The headphone output follows the signal selected in the Main Zone When headphones are plugged into the headphone output all Main Zone amplifier outputs are muted If amplifier outputs 3 and 7 are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3 they remain unmuted The Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also muted when headphones are plugged in Preamplifier outputs for Zone 2 and Zone3 remain unmuted See Headphone Overview on page 2 14 for additional headphone information Headphone listening mode information starts on page 6 34 2 5 Basic Operation Lexicon REAR PANEL OVERVIEW The RV 8 is shown below The numbers in the rear panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text SERIAL NO COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 1 INPUT2 e e e amp OUTPUT FRONT _ CENTER SIDE TRIGGER OUTPUTS MAIN OUTPUTS REAR LEXICON INC DESI 3NED AND ASSEMBLED IN U S A MIC1 MIC2 C INPUTS ZONE 3 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION Never make or break connections to the RV 8 unless the RV 8 and all associated components are powered off 2 6 RV 8 Basic Operation 1 AMPLIFIER OUTPUTS Provide audio outputs to the speakers The Center channel
61. INPUT menu 3 5 editing presets 2 12 EFFECT LVL parameter 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 15 6 23 6 41 ES DECODING parameter 6 25 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 40 6 42 6 44 6 46 ES ENCODING parameter 2 34 EX DECODING parameter 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 41 EX ENCODING parameter 2 34 EXTERNAL NOISE TEST 3 53 3 57 F factory default settings restoring 7 4 FADER parameter 4 2 D 4 FORMAT DETECT parameter 3 21 FORMAT parameter D 4 FREQUENCY option 3 76 Front L R output connector 2 7 2 7 FRONT L R parameter 3 29 3 31 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu 3 66 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY parameter 3 63 FRONT STEERING parameter 6 4 6 5 6 17 6 42 front panel BRIGHTNESS parameter 3 66 display 2 3 overview 2 2 2 4 RV 8 2 2 STATUS parameter 3 66 H HEADPHONE 5 1 listening mode 6 34 HEADPHONE 5 1a listening mode 6 35 HEADPHONE DTS listening mode 6 35 HEADPHONE L7 listening mode 6 34 headphone output 2 5 headphone overview 2 14 HEADPHONE parameter 3 69 highlights RV 8 1 4 high pass filter 3 28 3 28 horizontal bar graphs 2 16 RV 8 Index l CONFIG SETUP menu 3 2 INPUT BALANCE parameter 6 13 6 42 input connectors 2 7 microphone 2 8 INPUT NAM E menu 3 5 INPUT parameter 2 35 INPUT SELECT parameter 3 17 3 19 D 2 input selection buttons 2 4 remote control 2 18 INPUT SETUP menu 3 2 3 4 D 2 INPUT TYPE parameter 2 35 INPUTS Advanced 3 17 changing names 3 5 Main Zone 2 28 3 2 install
62. Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present SURR MIX LVL 40 0dB 3 0dB 6 0dB Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during the mixing process WORD LENGTH 16 bits 20 bits 24 bits Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left L center C front right R surround left SL surround right SR surround back SB and subwoofer SUB channels These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and digital input sources For instance the level meters indicate digital audio input levels when a digital audio source is present Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu depending on the source that is present The SB level meter appears when a 6 1 channel source is present or when a 5 1 channel source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON Level meters appear in combinations of green yellow and red when the on screen display is configured for a blue screen background Green indicates low levels yellow indicates normal levels and red indicates high levels and the onset of overload Level meters appear in white when the on screen display is not configured for a blue screen background 2 35 OA N E T 3 2 Input SETUP T 3 4 Changing Input
63. Keep it away from any heat sources Avoid dropping the remote control Clean the LCD screen with a soft cloth Never use abrasives or cleaning solutions on the soft cloth RECALLING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES FOR THE RV 8 To recall the RV 8 zone audio codes 1 Simultaneousy press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode 2 Pressthe RECAL button next to the LCD screen 3 The LCD display will alternatively flash device names and the three digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then exit to the SETUP mode Make sure that the audio code has the correct default number 4 The MAIN zone default audio code should be 001 The ZONE 2 default audio code is 302 and the ZONE 3 default audio code is 303 If one of these codes has inadvertently been changed reprogram the codes as described below C 16 RV 8 Appendix C REPROGRAMMING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES TO DEFAULT CODES To reprogram the RV 8 zone audio codes 1 2 3 Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode Press the P PRO button next to the LCD screen The remote should flash SELECT BUTTON at the bottom of the LCD screen Pressthe button for the zone you wish to reprogram The remote should flash FROM TABLE at the bottom of the LCD screen Select the MAIN zone button 5 The remote should flash ENTER NUMBER The correct default audio codes for the RV 8 zones are as follows MAIN zone is 001 ZONE 2 is 302 and ZONE 3 is
64. LINE STATUS Opens in the on screen and front panel displays whenever the RV 8 detects a Zone 3 status 19 34dB change The Zone 3 two line status indicates the current input input source and volume level selected in Zone 3 TUNER STATUS The Tuner status indicates the current frequency TUER band listening mode and volume level The 34dB Tuner status takes the place of the two line status display for inputs using the built in tuner STATUS MENUS Pressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menu for the current input source of the Main Zone which contains parameters that provide information about the current input source and listening mode STATUS menus are available for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES and 5 1 analog input sources Unlike most other menus STATUS menus cannot be opened through the selection of menu options Rather the remote control STAT2 button must be pressed To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input source 1 Under Zone 2 page 2 press STAT2 The first page of the STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the on screen and front panel displays If the STATUS menu includes a second page the PG1 indicator appears in the top right corner of the menu Press the STAT2 button to open the second page If the STATUS menu does not include a second page pressing the STAT2 button closes the menu If this occurs begin again with step
65. MARANTZ 012 031 067 069 AMPRO 072 MARTA 101 ANAM 031 MATSUI 027 030 AUDIO DYNAMICS 012 023 039 043 ME 031 BROOKSONIC 035 037 129 MEMOREX 003 010 014 031 034 053 072 101 102 134 139 CANON 028 031 MGA 045 046 059 CAPEHART 108 MINOLTA 013 020 CRAIG 003 040 135 MITSUBISHI 013 020 045 046 051 059 061 142 151 049 CURTIS M ATHES 031041 MTC 034 040 DAEWOO 005 007 010 065 108 110 111 112 116 117 119 MULTITECH 024 034 DAYTRON 108 NEC 012 023 039 043 048 DBX 012 023 039 043 NORDMENDE 043 DYNATECH 034 053 OPTONICA 053 054 059 ORION 025 EMERSON 006 017 025 027 029 031 034 035 036 037 046 101 129 PANASONIC 066 070 083 133 140 145 157 163 074 131 138 153 162 116 PENTAX 013 020 031 063 FISHER 003 008 009 010 PHILCO 031 034 067 FUNAI 034 PHILIPS 031 034 054 067 071 101 GE 031 063 072 107 109 144 147 PILOT 101 GO VIDEO 132 136 155 040 115 PIONEER 013 021 048 GOLDSTAR 012 013 020 101 106 114 123 PORTLAND 108 HARMAN KARDON 012 045 PULSAR 072 HITACHI 004 018 026 034 043 063 137 150 160 013 QUARTZ 002 014 IN STAN TREPLAY 031 QUASAR 066 145 075 JCL 031 RADIO SHACK 123 JCPENNY 012 013 015 040 066 101 RCA 013 020 041 107 109 140 144 145 147 034 040 158 JENSEN 043 REALISTIC 003 008 010 014 031 040 053 054 101 Jvc 012 031 043 048 050 055 060 130 150 152 RICO 058 KENWOOD 014 048 034 047 RUNCO 148 LLOYD 034 SALORA 014 LXI 003 009 017 034 106 SAMSUNG 032 040 066 102 104 107 109 112 113 115 120 122 125 MAGIN 040 SANSUI 022 043 048 135 C 21 Appe
66. MODE SUB NOTE CUSTOM ENSURE THAT CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUP HAS BEEN PROPERLY PERFORMED Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop down menu shown below and on the next page These drop down menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is selected However certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS CONTENT CENTER CNTR DLY SAMPLES CUSTOM VS PRESET DECODING ON BINAURL OFF 30 to 1248 127 to 127 PRESET AUTO OFF MONO Kwasi CUSTOM ON STEREO OFF ACADEMY FILTER BASS ENHANCE CENTER DEPTH COMPRESSION DIMENSION EX DECODING ON ON 0 to 18 AUTO FRONT AUTO OFF OFF ON NEUTRAL ON OFF REAR OFF AUTO AZIMUTH BASS RT CENTER MIX CTR WIDTH EFFECT LVL FRONT STEERING ON 5ms to 48 6s 25 to 5dB MIN 1 to 6 MAX 12 to 6dB OFF OFF Ss MSURR DE MUSIC FILM B 15 pendix Lexicon MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST continued INPUT BALANCE L lt d gt gt R LFE MIX 20 0 or 10 0 to 0 0dB 427 40 127 LIVENESS 30ms to 20 25 LOW FREQ WIDTH 25 to 25 1
67. OFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL Dolby Digital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audio outputs When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present the RV 8 will send the PCM audio to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX a downmix of the source will be sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors DIG OUT RATE 96kHz 88 2kHz 48kHz 44 1kHz Perur gt gt EI Controls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors When a value is selected the RV 8 runs the Zone 2 A D converters at the selected sample rate It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATE parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format that operates a single sample rate such as CD R format 44 1kHz Note DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals It does not change the sample rate of digital input signals or downmixed signals RECORD BLOCKED ENABLED gt EI Prevents recording device feedback loops When BLOCKED is selected the RV 8 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors to prevent feedback loops However the RV 8 still passes video input signals to the Zone 2 video output connectors When ENABLED is selected the RV 8 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2 audio and video output connectors 3 24 RV 8
68. Output Connector L Front L R Front R C Center SUB Subwoofer LS Side L and Rear L RS Side R and Rear R 4 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS Three component video input connectors labeled Component Video 1 to are available for use in the Main Zone and have full HDTV compat ibility The ultra wide bandwidth component video switcher accepts any analog component or RGB video input type The component video connectors are not available for Zone 2 or Zone 3 5 MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide video output in the Main Zone Two composite video connectors two S Video connectors and one component video connector are available 2 7 Basic Operation Lexicon REAR PANEL OVERVIEW continued 6 ZONE 2 VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide video output in Zone 2 One composite video connector and one S Video connector is available Alternatively these connectors can be used to connect a video recording device Note Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or S Video source is present S Video output connectors are available when an S Video source is present Component video output connectors are available when a component video source is present 7 ZONE 2 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio output in Zone 2 Two pairs of connectors one labeled Fix and the other labeled Var are available These connectors can also be used to con
69. Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE 5 1a BYPASS INPUT TYPE BYPASS See STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information 5 1a BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE 5 1a BYPASS INPUT TYPE BYPASS 2 31 Basic Operation Lexicon 2CH BYPASS STATUS Provides information about 2 channel analog input sources when the MAIN ADV menu 2 CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE 2CH BYPASS INPUT TYPE BYPASS See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information 2CH BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE 2CH BYPASS INPUT TYPE BYPASS DIGITAL STATUS Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample rate is detected but no audio is present in the input signal Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode INPUT TYPE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information DIGITAL STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE 2 32 RV 8 Basic Operation 5 1 ANALOG STATUS Provides information about 5 1 channel analog input sources LIVE STATUS Provides information about LIVE input sources Features L and R level meters Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listenin
70. Press the a arrow button to high light the desired speaker calibration parameter Then press the gt arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker A message similar to the one shown above will display Refer to the table on page 3 52 for infor mation about all possible speaker calibra tion messages This menu is displayed but not user accessible during Auto Distance Calibra tion or after Auto Calibration 3 50 RV 8 Setup DISTANCES SET DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES FRONT LEFT 12 0ft ORIGINAL DISTANCES CENTER 10 5ft FRONT RIGHT 12 0ft SIDE RIGHT 4 511 REAR RIGHT ERROR REAR LEFT 6 011 SIDE LEFT 4 58 SUBWOOFER Use the SET DISTANCES menu to select the desired speaker distances 1 Press the 4 arrow button to return to the SET DISTANCES menu Press the or arrow button to tog gle between calibrated speaker distances AUTO and original speaker distances The speaker graphics at the bottom of the menu update to indicate the selected values 3 Pres the gt button to apply the selected values A confirmation message is displayed to indicate the applied val ues 4 Press the 4 button twice in succession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessi ble after the DISTANCES amp LEVELS calibra tion is performed as a combined procedure DISTANCES amp LEVELS AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
71. Pressing the HOME button and Up on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast darker Pressing the HOME button and Down on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast brighter BATTERY LIFE Under normal operating conditions the batteries will last approximately six months If the batteries are running low there will be reduced range from the remote commands that are not sent properly or are not sent at all The backlighting of the LCD screen and the buttons may be diminished Should any of these occur replace the batteries immediately To ensure proper performance of the remote use four new AAA alkaline batteries However the worn batteries should be replaced with a fresh set as soon as possible Do not mix new and used batteries Note If the batteries are running low the LCD displays LOW BATTERY when the POWER button is pressed or when the HOME and ENT but tons are pressed simultaneously The remote has an internal memory lock system that retains all of the programs and learned functions for an extended period of time in the event of battery loss or replacement CAUTION The LCD screen is breakable glass Do not tap the LCD screen to activate devices Use the rubber buttons beside the labels on the screen The RV 8 remote control is not waterproof Never immerse it in water Keep the LCD screen dry Immediately wipe off any spilled liquid Do not expose the RV 8 remote to extreme temperatures
72. REAR 5 SPKRENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OFF 1 to 30ms L7 TV DE gt This listening mode is designed for playback of 2 channel stereo or matrix encoded television broadcast sources Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the Logic 7 FILM listening mode but specifically tailored for broadcast sources Parameter AUTO AZIMUTH ON VOCAL ENHANCE 40 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM Default Setting Possible Settings ON OFF 43 0dB 40 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 SPKRENHANCE ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OFF 1 to 30ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 4 RV 8 Mode Adjust L7 MUSIC MODE ADJUST EN This listening mode is designed for playback of 2 channel stereo or matrix encoded music sources Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the Logic 7 FILM listening mode but specifically tailored for musi
73. Related Transfer Functions to create a headphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surround sound while preserving the original stereo image In addition to Logic 7 the RV 8 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic DTS 96 24 DTS neo 6 DTS ES THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding THX Ultra2 certification guarantees that the RV 8 meets the highest THX specifications The RV 8 also offers LIVE Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment designed to transform the way your listening room sounds with the live sound that is created within the room by the occupants of the room LIVE does not nor is it meant to work with prerecorded material LIVE provides a realistic illusion of a larger more reverberant listening space ideal for musicians wishing to practice or perform with the sound of a larger venue LIVE is a unique sophisticated reverberation system that uses a combination of microphones and digital signal processing DSP to enhance a room s acoustics and create the illusion of a much larger space When you engage in normal conversation it seems as if you are in a large room When you practice or perform with a musical instrument it seems as if you are in a concert hall Choose from one of three customizable presets to create an ambience to liven up a party or amaze your friends With two floating point Hammerhead digital signal processing DSP engines the RV 8 boasts enormous proces
74. SURR 5 1 MONO and all DTS modes LISTENER POS Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered between the front left and right speakers Each increment within the 127 to 4127 parameter range represents about one third of an inch Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5 13 for more information Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode 127 to 127 Note The LISTEN ER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the front left and right speakers LIVENESS 30msto 20 2s Depends on the SIZE parameter setting The LIVENESS parameter adjusts the amount of effect recirculation Higher settings mimic more reflective surfaces and increase decay time Available in NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes LOW FREQ WIDTH 25 to 425dB Applies low frequency spatial correction to the input signal This correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz Available in PANORAMA mode 6 42 RV 8 Mode Adjust MASTER LEVEL 5 to 45dB Adjusts the output level of 2 channel Logic 7 encoded sources Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL and DTS ES 2 CHAN modes MID RT Works with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time required for mid frequency information to decay below 60dB in level The full parameter range might not be available depending on the SIZE parameter setting Available in CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes 24ms to 24 3s CAUTION Setting the BASS RT MID RT or SI
75. TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS TUNER PRESETS SETUP BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE ZONE3 BALANCE LOUDNESS Controls the amount of low frequency boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center and Sub When ON is selected loudness compensation is automatically applied based on volume level As volume level increases the amount of boost automatically decreases The loudness contour is optimized for input sources calibrated to THX reference levels When OFF is selected no loudness compensation is applied ON OFF The LOUDNESS Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response that is automatically applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main Zone volume level is adjusted 4 4 RV 8 Audio Controls TILT EQ Parameter Settings 28 28 3 0 oe 26 25 1002 4 20 18 VW 7047 18 16 N 16 10k 20k 3 0 10 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k Hz The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the M ain Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center and Sub LOUDNESS Parameter Settings SN z The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low frequency boost that is automatically applied to the M ain Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center and Sub Audio Controls Lexicon
76. TUNER PRESETS SETUP FRONT L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R 80 Hz CENTER 80 Hz SIDE L R 80 Hz REAR L R 80 Hz SUBWOOFER 80 Hz THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF BGC APART CENTER SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60 2 70 2 80 2 THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING ON OFF APART CLOSE TOGETHER SIDE L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50 2 60 2 70 2 80 2 80 2 90 2 100Hz 110 2 120 2 NONE CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP A dex qd 0 1 NS Di 8 THX SETUP CAUTION FRONT L R PRESSING THE CENTER BUTTON WILL SIDE L R AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE REAR UR THE OUTPUTS TO A THX SPEAKER THX ULTRA2 SUB CONFIGURATION BGC ASA REAR L R SPEAKERS SUBWOOFER gu FULL FULL SUB 30Hz QUAE 40Hz 10 50Hz 60Hz couz 70Hz 2062 80Hz gonz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz gonz 100Hz 110Hz pa 120Hz 120Hz NONE NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz OFF N A APART THX REAR SPEAKERS THX 80Hz NONE ON OFF AP
77. V At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers Note LIVE can potentially create feedback in the system The processing is designed to prevent this but you should avoid placing the microphones too close to speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement during LIVE calibration and also for permanent location Microphone Subwoofer Front Right 3 81 Setup Lexicon IM PRO PER microphone positioning for LIVE When positioning the microphones DO NOT X Place the microphones on the front or rear walls X Placethe microphones near the floor or ceiling X Obstruct the microphones with furniture or other fixtures X Place the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of any speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement for LIVE calibration or for a permanent location M icrophone Center Subwoofer Front Right 3 82 RV 8 Setup PERFORMING LIVE CALIBRATION MAIN MENU SETUP LIVE CALIBRATION LIVE CALIBRATION LIVE CALIBRATION MODE ADJUST INPUTS CAUTION TEST WILL BEGIN IN IN PROGRESS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS HIGH AUDIO LEVELS 10 TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC PRESS gt TO SKIP LIVE CALIBRATION CALIBRATION DONE VOLUME CONTROLS TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR COUNTDOWN PLEASE WAIT TRIGGER SIT QUIETLY TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS PRESS TO BEGIN LIVE CALIB
78. Zone 2 or Zone 3 but tons Doing so will remove RV 8 control IMPORTANT POINTS TO REMEMBER If the remote control fails to learn a function after a first attempt Keep the remotes stable by placing them on a flat surface Make sure the original remote is pointed at the learning eye at the top end of the case and is not at an angle Make sure both remotes batteries aren t low Avoid programming the RV 8 remote under bright lights which can interfere with the infrared signals Some buttons require a single short push of the original remote s button other repeating buttons such as the VOL button require that you press and hold the original remote s button until Good flashes twice on the LCD screen Try varying the distance between the remotes to find an optimal distance at which the codes are leamed on the first or second try C 7 Appendix Lexicon PROGRAMMING THE FUNCTION BUTTONS To program the Function Buttons 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen Select the DEVICE that contains the function button you wish to program Press the PAGE button to go to page 2 of the device if necessary 5 Place the original remote control head to head with the RV 8 remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface 6 Pressthe button on the RV 8 remote you wish to program Only the thre
79. an ERROR mes sage appears on the las CHECK MICROPHONES screen press 4 or v arrow button to highlight the desired microphone Then press the arrow button to view more details about the error One of the messages shown to the left will appear in the on screen display B 6 RV 8 Appendix B MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SETTING DISTANCES FRONT LEFT 0 0ft CENTER 0 0ft FRONT RIGHT 0 0ft SIDE RIGHT 0 0ft REAR RIGHT 0 0ft REAR LEFT 0 0ft SIDE LEFT 0 0ft SUBWOOFER 0 0ft SETTING LEVELS FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens shown on the right indicate the individual calibra tion results for each speaker Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker cali bration parameter Then press the arrow but ton to view more detailed results for the selected speaker Press the arrow button to retum to the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above right Then pressthe gt arrow button to select the other calibration procedure or pressthe arrow button to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTO
80. as the title and performer of the current song the station call letters or the station byline Not all stations broadcast RT When tuned to a station that broadcasts Radio Text it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text When Radio Text is active additional information is displayed in the scrolling text After the RT from the radio station has finished scrolling double asterisks are displayed followed by the currently set listening mode volume level and tuner frequency A second set of double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and the beginning repeat of the station s Radio Text MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT EON Controls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text The default setting is MEDIUM For faster text scrolling select FAST For slower text scrolling select SLOW TUNER SETUP SLOW REGION MEDIUM SCAN SENS FAST AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT ON SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTO FREQUENCY ON 3 77 Setup Lexicon TUNER SETUP continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWE
81. be displayed RDS NAME displaysthe station s Program Service PS name which is intended to be used to identify a station or station program If the RDS information is not available then the channel frequency will be displayed FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channel selected TUNER SETUP REGION SCAN SENS AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT ON SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTO FREQUENCY ON Note RDS NAME PRESET NAME FREQUENCY In the US some stations broadcast other information in place of the Program Service PS name such as a text messaging feature similar to Radio Text RT This can make it difficult to identify the station You may wish to select PRESET NAM E instead of an RSD NAME in this instance 3 76 RV 8 Setup MAIN MENU SETUP TUNER SETUP ON MODE ADJUST INPUTS REGION OFF AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SCAN SENS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOLOAD SETUP DISPLAYS CLEAR ALL VOLUME CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS TRIGGER DISPLAY RDS NAME TUNER SETUP RADIO TEXT ON LOCK OPTIONS SCROLL RATE MEDIUM LIVE CALIBRATION AUTO FREQUENCY ON POWER MANAGEMENT RADIO TEXT ON OFF SCROLL RATE SLOW MEDIUM FAST Eat gt EES gt M Activates the RADIO TEXT RT feature Radio Text is presented as scrolling text in the bottom row of the front panel and on screen displays Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatever text the station broadcasts such
82. between the amplifier and the speakers Observe correct speaker polarity CAUTION Do not connect the outputs of one channel to the outputs of other channels or to other amplifiers 2 13 Basic Operation Lexicon HEADPHONE OVERVIEW Headphones can be connected to the RV 8 via the Headphone output on the front panel The headphone output follows the signal selected in the Main Zone If the Main Zone source is multichannel a downmix of the source is sent to the headphone output LOGIC7 headphone processing is also available for stereo or multichannel sources To listen to a stereo source without enhanced processing set the 2 CH parameter in the INPUT SETUP menu to the 2 CHANNEL listening mode When headphones are plugged into the headphone output all amplifier outputs are muted including outputs 3 and 7 unless they are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3 The Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also muted Preamplifier outputs for Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain unmuted Use the front panel volume knob or the remote control Volume Up Down buttons to adjust the headphone output level When the headphones are plugged into the headphone output the volume defaults to the HEADPHONE parameter value selected in the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu When the headphones are unplugged the volume defaults to the value of the MAIN PWR ON parameter in the VOLUM E CONTROL SETUP menu See page 6 34 for headphone listening mode descriptions REMOTE CONTROL OV
83. engaged when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is engaged THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are deactivated Note Some EX encoded sources are not flagged and require manually setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding When THX Ultra2 decoding is active Adaptive de correlation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space De correlation of the mono surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in home theaters Input Source 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX Parameter Setting Dolby Digital Flagged Dolby Digital Non Flagged SURROUND EX AUTO THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX ULTRA2 SURROUND EX ON THX SurEX THX SurEX THX SurEX SURROUND EX OFF THX ULTRA2 THX ULTRA2 THX ULTRA2 6 18 RV 8 Mode Adjust ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 31 for more informa
84. is activated scans selected input press 4 4 once to tune to the next through the disc in reverse direction available tuner frequency Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode which searches 26 for the next available radio station To enter 1 s aera TRUM Scan Mode press and hold until the display 9 shows 4 SCAN or SCAN gt 27 When a DTS ES source is present toggles the Opensthe RT 10 or RT 20 disc menu ES decoding parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings 28 Deactivates the output connector labeled Stops playback of the loaded disc Trigger 1 29 Activates the Dolby DIGITAL or Dolby DIGITAL Activates RT 10 or RT 20 pause mode listening mode when a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present Activates Dolby PLIIx Movie when a stereo source is present 30 When a menu is open scrolls upward through menu items 31 Opens the menu structure and selects the Navigates to the right in the RT 10 or RT 20 menu highlighted item When no menu is open structure opens the MAIN MENU 32 When a menu is open scrolls downward through menu items 2 25 Basic Operation Lexicon e 11111 33 History dependent When a menu is open closes the menu and in most cases opens the previous menu Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed When no menusare open shows the two line status
85. listening mode returns to its custom condition INPUT SOURCE LISTENING MODE 2 Channel MOVIE 0 M OVIE Dolby Digital DUDIGITAL DTS ES 5 1 Channel Analog 5 1a BYPASS These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE will only load when side and rear speakers are present These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source speaker setup and parameter settings Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section beginning on page 6 4 for more information the Advanced M enu input is set to ANALOG BYPASS OFF the listening mode for the EXTERNAL NOISE TEST is 5 1 STANDARD Note When the external noise test begins the RV 8 automatically sets volume level to 0dB Avoid adjusting the master volume level while the test is in progress to achieve THX reference levels 7 5dB To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test 1 Set the SPL meter to C weighting and SLOW response 2 Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position 3 Pressthe or arrow button to highlight the output level parameter you want Then press the button to select this output level parameter The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3 55 is displayed 4 Begin playback of the extemal calibration source and press the 4 or arrow button to select the output level that
86. microphone input connectors If the microphones are disconnected you should perform the micro phone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration 3 41 Setup Lexicon CHECKING THE MICROPHONES continued Message Description Troubleshooting MICROPHONE OK The microphone detected the calibration noise signal without error N A MICROPHONE NOT DETECTED The RV 8 did not detect the microphone during the silence check Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the RV 8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection The microphone may be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance MICROPHONE SIGNAL TOO LOW The RV 8 detected the microphone dur ing the slence check However the microphone level determined during the silence check was not confirmed during the microphone check Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con nected to the RV 8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3 38 to confirm that the microphones are appropri ately positioned for the microphone check The microphone may be damaged Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance
87. no longer function as ON and OFF buttons for components To restore their original on and off function erase any macros programmed onto them PROGRAM MING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO M1 M2 M3 POWER AND SYSTEM OFF BUTTONS To program macro functions to the M1 M2 M3 Power System Off buttons 1 Goto the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT button simultaneously for three seconds Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen Press the macro button M1 M2 M3 Power or System Off being programmed 4 Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro button you selected in the order you want them stored Up to 20 commands can be stored 5 Besureto end a macro on the Device page that you would like it to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use 6 Store the commands programmed into the macro button by pressing the CH UP button 7 Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the Macros that you require 8 When programming is complete press the HOME button Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again Note Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro or it will not work The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro TheM 1 M2 M3 POWER and SYSTEM OFF macros are system wide which means they will function the same no matter what device is being used when they are programmed PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO THE TEN DEVICE BUTTONS To program Macr
88. or remote control number buttons A Loading Preset status message appears in the front panel and on screen display If a third digit is entered the tuner switches over to Direct Station Access mode and the front panel status message changes to Setting Frequency To skip through available presets in order Press the remote control M4 or button For example if preset 1 is loaded and the button is pressed the RV 8 will load preset 2 or the next available preset If preset 1 is loaded and the m4 button is pressed the RV 8 will load preset 40 or the next available preset Note This feature is only accessible via the remote control SAVING PRESETS The RV 8 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations The presets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank It is possible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in each bank Storing presets on the RV 8 can be accomplished from either the front panel or the remote control The operation is identical To save a station as a preset on the RV 8 l Press the front panel or remote control SAVE button A status message displaying Saving Preset appears in the front panel and on screen display 2 Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loaded frequency as the corresponding preset For example if the tuner is currently playing 101 7FM press the SAVE button then the 1 button to save 101 7FM as preset number 1 Press the 1 bu
89. output and all Right channel outputs are located on the left hand side of the rear panel All Left channel outputs are located on the right hand side of the rear panel This organizaion facilitates making speaker connections The amplifier binding posts accommodate the following connectors standard 0 75 inch banana plugs Size 10 12 gauge spade connectors up to 10 gauge bare wire See page 2 13 for additional amplifier information 2 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS Provide video input in the Main Zone Zone 2 and Zone 3 Five composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5 and five S Video connectors labeled S Video 1 to 5 are available 3 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone Zone 2 and Zone 3 Eight stereo analog audio input connectors labeled Audio 1 to 8 are available Connectors labeled 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 can be configured as 5 1 channel connectors When a 5 1 channel analog audio source is present in the M ain Zone input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the following table When a 5 1 channel analog source is present in the Main Zone only the Front L and input signals are sent to the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors If the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX a downmix of the 5 1 analog source is sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors See ZONE2 in Parameter Settings on page 3 22 for additional information Input Connector
90. output connectors 2 9 DIGITAL BYPASS parameter 3 23 3 24 DIGITAL IN parameter 3 7 DIGITAL STATUS menu 2 32 DIMENSION parameter 6 8 6 40 direct station access 2 10 DISPLAY parameter 3 76 DISPLAY SETUP menu 3 2 3 63 DISTANCES amp LEVELS option 3 36 3 48 DISTANCES option 3 36 3 48 documentation conventions 1 ii DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode 6 22 DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode 6 22 DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu 3 15 Dolby DIGITAL parameter 3 12 DOLBY PL THX listening mode 6 9 DOLBY PLII MOV listening mode 6 7 DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode 6 7 DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode 6 8 DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode 6 20 DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode 6 8 DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode 6 9 6 9 DOLBY STATUS menu 2 30 DTS 2 CHAN listening mode 6 29 DTS L7 FILM listening mode 6 26 DTS listening mode 6 28 DTS Neo 6 listening mode 6 10 6 CIN listening mode 6 10 6 MUSIC listening mode 6 10 DTS STATUS menu 2 31 DTS THX MUSIC listening mode 6 28 DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode 6 27 DTS ES 2 CHAN listening mode 6 29 DTS ES DECODING parameter 6 25 DTS ES DISCR listening mode 6 28 DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode 6 26 DTS ES L7 MUSIC listening mode 6 26 DTS ES listening mode 6 28 DTS ES MODE menu 3 16 DTS ES parameter 3 12 DTS ES STATUS menu 2 31 DTS ES THX listening mode 6 27 Dynamic listening modes 3 13 6 3 E EARLY RFLX LVL parameter 6 41 EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter 3 63 3 67 D 4 EDIT
91. remote control buttons 2 17 remote control overview 2 14 remote control programming C 2 auto scan with three digit number C 6 device activation C 2 macro operations C 3 overview C 4 programming device buttons C 8 programming favorite channels C 9 programming function buttons C 8 using leaming method C 7 using programmed codes C 5 REMOTE ONLY parameter 3 70 reprogramming zone audio codes C 17 RESET MODE parameter 6 38 6 44 RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu 3 6 restoring factory default settings 7 4 REVERB LVL parameter 6 40 6 42 6 44 6 44 6 46 ROLLOFF parameter 6 11 6 12 6 44 routine maintenance 7 4 RS 232 connectors 2 9 RV 8 about 1 2 highlights 1 4 product registration 1 5 S safety instructions 1 ii SAMPLE RATE parameter 2 35 saving presets 2 11 Scan Mode 2 11 SCAN SENS parameter 3 73 SCROLL RATE parameter 3 77 selecting a station 2 10 SET CROSSOVERS option 3 25 SET DISTANCES menu 3 51 SET LEVELS menu 3 51 SETTING DISTANCES menu 3 49 SETTING LEVELS menu 3 49 SETUP menu 2 16 3 2 SHAPE parameter 6 44 SIDE L R parameter 3 29 3 32 6 37 6 44 SIZE parameter 6 11 6 12 6 44 SOUND STAGE parameter 6 4 6 5 6 16 6 17 6 44 SOURCE parameter 6 46 SPEAKER ANGLE parameter 6 45 SPEAKER DISTANCES 3 53 SPEAKER DISTANCES menu 3 54 SPEAKER SETUP menu 3 2 3 25 Speaker setup parameters 3 29 SPEECH DETECT parameter 6 11 6 12 6 45 SPREAD parameter 6 45 Standby button 2 4 ST
92. signal to the center speaker Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the center speaker Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the center speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker select NONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L R output connectors unless the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is activated In this case configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD A SACD player to redirect center channel signals End gt EIEN gt ESSE gt When THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the Center output connector and the CENTER parameter cannot be adjusted 3 31 Setup Lexicon SPEAKER SETUP PARAM ETERS continued SIDE L R FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE Ea gt EZX gt gt Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled SIDE L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Select FULL to send a full range signal to the side speakers Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the side speakers Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the side speakers and du
93. switching between anamorphic and non anamorphic display modes 3 18 RV 8 Setup INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO The RV 8 sends the assigned digital audio input connector to the Main Zone audio output connectors The RV 8 ignores the assigned analog audio input connector Note the following The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources The digital audio input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources If an incompatible digital audio source e g MPEG or MP3 is present the RV 8 automati cally selects the assigned analog audio input connector The RV 8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL when the ANALOG IN parameter is set to NONE If ANALOG IN is set to NONE the RV 8 will mute The DIGITAL IN parameter can be used to assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input The RV 8 sends the assigned analog audio input connector to the Main Zone audio output connectors The RV 8 ignores the digital audio input connector Note the following The RV 8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE The ANALOG IN parameter can be used to assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input The RV 8 toggles between sending the assigned digital and analog audio input conne
94. the PAUSE button three timesallows for an extra 6 seconds of wait time 3 x 2 seconds per push 6 seconds This step is included in this example because most receivers and amps take time to cycle up and cannot receive any commands such as input until the device is ready This example enabled the other steps of the macro to run while the Audio device is cycling up Press SAT This selects the SAT input on the RV 8 Press HOME Press SAT Back to this device to enter the appropriate channel Press 1 then 3 then 5 Then press the ENT button if the cable device requires it Press CH UP to save the macro Press HOME twice Press M1 to test the macro It should turn on the RV 8 then the TV then the satellite box then change the input to SAT on the RV 8 then change the channel to 135 C 11 Appendix Lexicon Note A macro can end on any page induding the HOME page In the previous example the macro was ended on the SAT page before saving it as this was the desired endpoint PROGRAMMING PUNCH THROUGH FUNCTIONS The RV 8 volume control can be used in a different mode using the volume punch through feature You can also have channel punch through Channel Up Channel Down as well as eight VCR or DVD transport buttons Play Stop Fast Forward and Rewind Skip Skip Pause Record operate in another mode such as SAT CD and RV 8 MAIN modes To program punch through functions l Go
95. to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen Press the LEARN button C 14 RV 8 Appendix C 4 If you wish to erase all the learned functions in the RV 8 remote press the ALL button and then press the SURE button at the next LCD screen 5 Toeraseall the buttons in a single device or an individual button in the device press the DEVICE button 6 Press the device button TV VCR MAIN etc to erase the button s from the device Note Press the PAGE button and then press the DEVICE button TV VCR etc to erase the learned function in the device button itself 7 Press the ALL button to erase all the learned buttons in the device and press the SURE button at the next LCD screen 8 Pressasingle button to erase individual buttons one at a time This will show all the functions in the device Press the button you wish to erase PROGRAM MING THE BACKLIGHT TO TURN OFF The backlight can be toggled On and Off by pushing the LIGHT button on the top right side of the remote It can also be set to turn off at a predetermined time To program the backlight 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the LIGHT button next to the LCD screen Using the number pad buttons enter the desired backlight time in seconds It can go up to 99 seconds Save the time by press
96. 0 press the AM FM button to select the AM band then press 1 0 3 0 Note When digits are first entered a Loading Preset status message appears in the front panel and on screen display When a third digit is entered the RV 8 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the status message to Setting Frequency TUNE SEEK ACCESS Press one of the Tune Seek buttons on the front panel 4 or remote control 44 y to navigate to the next available frequency For example if the currently loaded frequency is 101 7FM pressthe Tune Seek button to load 101 9FM Pressthe Tune Seek button again to load 102 1FM and so on Press one of the Tune Seek buttons on the front panel 4 or remote control 4 4 for 2 seconds to activate seek mode Seek mode searches for the next available radio station If the tuner is having difficulty locating stations raise the sensitivity level See SCAN SENS on 3 73 for more information 2 10 RV 8 Basic Operation SCAN MODE Scan Mode scans through all available stations pausing for two seconds on each station before scanning to the next one To enter Scan Mode Press and hold the front panel 4 or remote control 44 gt gt Tune Seek buttons until 4 SCAN or SCAN gt is displayed To stop scanning Press either Tune Seek button LOADING PRESETS To load a preset Enter a preset number between 1 and 40 using the front panel
97. 057 22 RV 8 Appendix C TV TV Manufacturer Codes Manufacturer Codes FUJITSU 198 NEC 132 130 134 197 040 016 024 056 019 FUNAI 028 043 NIKEI 043 FUTURETECH 043 ONKING 043 GE 197 008 009 034 056 073 074 130 144 155 160 161 165 ONWA 043 004 091 157 183 OPTONICA 019 081 GOLDSTAR 004 102 106 112 113 116 119 127 143 ORION 096 HALL M ARK 004 PANASONIC 034 056 080 092 164 HITACHI 004 009 010 011 012 023 075 143 158 163 166 072 PHILCO 197 003 024 056 059 060 063 064 164 004 INFINITY 164 PHILIPS 197 003 004 005 038 059 093 164 127 JBL 164 PIONEER 197 018 023 025 116 135 190 203 204 JCPENNY 197 004 008 009 024 030 065 101 143 156 160 PORTLAND 004 143 JENSEN 013 PROSCAN 144 160 161 165 167 NC 034 038 070 083 145 199 PROTON 004 058 131 143 171 173 193 KEC 043 QUASAR 034 056 092 KENWOOD 197 070 RADIO SHACK 019 043 143 004 127 KLOSS 002 059 RCA 160 161 165 065 156 144 197 004 023 024 056 074 152 KMC 143 REALISTIC 007 019 043 047 KTV 197 043 143 154 ROCTEC 186 LODGENET 072 RUNCO 168 169 178 179 180 181 182 183 073 157 LOGIK 072 SAM PO 197 058 004 202 LUXMAN 004 SAM SUNG 004 050 089 101 105 127 143 160 LXI 166 007 015 052 081 160 164 SANYO 166 007 020 053 057 082 187 MAGNAVOX 197 003 004 022 059 060 061 063 064 127 160 164 094 SCOTT 004 028 043 048 143 MARANTZ 197 164 SEARS 015 030 004 007 028 057 143 094 160 082 165 166 MATSUI 164 SH 189 200 MEMOREX 007 072 004 SHARP 170 081 019 028 029 014 004 022 143 175 METZ 088 SIEMENS 088 MGA 197 004 02
98. 057 066 SIGNATURE 103 ECHOSTAR 106 SL MARX 030 ELECTRICORD 032 SONY 096 GEMINI 008 054 SPRUCER 047 078 GENERAL ELECTRIC 072 STARCOM 002 004 008 009 GENERALINSTRUMENT 103 074 104 STARGATE 008 030 097 104 GNC 099 TADIRAN 030 GOLDEN CHANNEL 030 TIME WARNER 043 HAM LIN 049 050 055 TOCOM 039 040 056 HITACHI 103 055 TOSHIBA 052 JERROLD 103 002 003 004 008 009 010 069 074 UNIKA 007 014 MAGNAVOX 010 012 064 079 095 094 UNITED CABLE 004 053 MEDIA ONE 107 UNIVERSAL 005 007 014 032 035 MEMOREX 052 VIEWSTAR 012 015 018 086 087 088 089 MITSUBISHI 102 ZENITH 052 060 093 100 M NET 037 MOVIE TIME 028 032 NOVAPLEX 092 NSC 015 028 038 071 C 27 Appendix Lexicon TAPE Manufacturer AIWA CARVER DENON FISHER GOLDSTAR HARMAN KARDON Jc KENWOOD LINN LUXMAN MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MCINTOSH MITSUBISHI NAD NAKAM ICHI ONKYO OPTIMUS PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER QUASAR SANSUI SHARP SHERWOOD SONY TEAC TECHNICS TOSHIBA VICTOR YAM AHA Codes 015 071 100 114 006 008 027 024 036 105 227 229 064 011 233 106 116 239 240 005 013 023 026 064 145 146 181 190 124 035 137 139 027 014 027 056 065 087 238 242 243 029 048 244 245 025 002 012 016 017 018 019 115 026 054 055 007 010 032 088 195 027 087 003 039 047 050 066 098 222 007 088 027 113 119 224 026 057 131 175 181 038 004 028 030 033 034 020 022 052 084 089 009 059 212 007 010 076 088 109 122 199 112 106 021 026 031 067 040 C 28
99. 1 When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened press the remote control Menu and arrowsto scroll upward and downward through the complete list of available parameters Note STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current input source and listening mode These parameters cannot be adjusted Press the STAT2 button or the Menu lt arrow to close the STATUS menu If the second page of the STATUS menu opens press the STAT2 button or the Menu arrow again to close the STATUS menu STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page The table beneath each description lists the default and possible settings for each parameter STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2 34 STATUS menu level meters are described on page 2 35 2 29 Basic Operation Lexicon 2CH STATUS Provides information about 2 channel input sources Features L and R level meters Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode INPUT TYPE ANLG PCM SAM PLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information 2CH STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE STATUS Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources Features L C SL SR and LFE level meters Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode
100. 16 BGC parameter 3 29 3 35 BIT RATE parameter 2 34 boundary gain compensation 3 35 BRIGHTNESS parameter D 4 CAL NOISE parameter 3 58 D 3 Calibration automatic 3 36 manual 3 53 CALIBRATION parameter 6 13 6 39 Index Lexicon CATHEDRAL listening mode 6 12 CENTER DEPTH parameter 6 11 6 12 6 40 CENTER MIX LVL parameter 2 34 CENTER MIX parameter 6 23 6 29 6 33 6 40 Center output connector 2 7 CENTER parameter 3 29 3 31 6 37 6 40 changing input names 3 5 CHANNELS parameter 2 34 checking microphones 3 41 CHURCH listening mode 6 12 CLEAR ALL parameter 3 75 CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter 6 23 6 29 6 33 6 40 COMPONENT IN parameter 3 7 3 11 COMPONENT OSD parameter 3 17 3 20 3 21 D 2 component video input connectors 2 7 Composite video connectors 2 8 COMPRESSION parameter 6 16 6 17 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 40 CONCERT HALL listening mode 6 11 CROSSOVER SETUP menu 3 26 CTR WIDTH parameter 6 8 6 40 CUSTOM menu 6 37 6 40 CUSTOM NAME parameter 3 63 3 67 CUSTOM parameter 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 40 CUSTOM SETUP Menu 3 29 CUSTOM SETUP menu 3 26 D 3 custom speaker setups 3 26 CUSTOM vs PRESET listening modes 6 37 6 40 D Declaration of Conformity A 4 DIALOG OFFSET parameter 2 34 DIG OUT RATE parameter 3 23 3 24 digital audio input connectors 2 8 digital audio
101. 2 27 Basic Operation Lexicon UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES The RV 8 features three zones of operation the Main Zone Zone 2 and Zone 3 The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the primary listening space Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio and composite or S Video signals for a second zone or recording device Zone 3 is designed to control analog audio and composite or S video signals in an additional listening space The headphone output follows the source selected in the Main Zone LOGIC7 Headphone processing is available on this output The following are exceptions to independent zone operation 1 The same Dolby Digital or DTS ES input source be simul taneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2 However different Dolby Digital or DTS ES input sources cannot be present in the Main Zone and Zone 2 2 Zone2 can provide a 2 channel downmix of Main Zone multi channel audio when all of the following conditions are met same input must be selected in the Main Zone and Zone 2 A Dolby Digital DTS ES or 5 1a input source must be present in the Main Zone The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set to DMIX See ZONE2 in Parameter Settings on page 3 22 for more information 3 The Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors will receive Front L R when a 5 1a source is present in the Main Zone and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG 4 When 5 1a BYPASS or 2 CH BYPASS is s
102. 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 5 1 MUSIC Tax SurEX Tax MUSIC 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR ITTTTTTI TRIGGER SETUP ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TRIGGER SETUP 212 4 Emmex MUSIC tts 117 Cities 2 CHAN 5 1a i FILM 5 1a 5i MUSIC 5 1a 1x SurEX 5 1a z MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS HEADPHONE ti HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE mmr HEADPHONE 5 1 LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode names are fixed meaning these names do not change when certain encoding is present For instance the 5 1 THX SurEX listening mode label appears whether THX Ultra2 THX Sur round EX or no encod ing is engaged 3 71 Setup Lexicon TUNER SETUP EI Selecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu which is used to configure the AM FM radio tuner MAIN MENU SETUP TUNER SETUP USA MODE ADJUST INPUTS REGION EUROPE AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SCAN SENS En TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOLOAD i SETUP DISPLAYS CLEAR ALL VOLUME CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS TRIGGER DISPLAY RDS TUNER SETUP RADIO TEXT ON LOCK OPTIONS SCROLLRATE MEDIUM LIVE CALIBRATION AUTO FREQUENCY ON POWER MANAGEMENT Defau
103. 216 206 058 240 163 191 114 266 279 026 066 145 146 181 190 197 192 182 199 151 222 180 005 280 220 140 216 150 072 007 120 235 236 237 124 137 139 052 165 115 004 009 076 056 038 164 152 208 006 028 031 040 063 185 186 251 265 238 076 100 012 013 242 243 204 157 158 042 043 081 112 276 186 113 283 111 244 245 172 183 176 017 046 064 107 108 187 079 080 090 179 209 270 275 026 041 138 C 18 RV 8 Appendix C AUDIO DVD Manufacturer Codes Manufacturer Codes PANASONIC 032 195 219 177 APEX DIGITAL 087 iie UND a 130 132 261 DENON 007 ne PHILIPS 249 250 251 063 GE 026 027 PIONEER 014 033 039 044 045 050 069 159 168 116 035 078 198 HARMAN KARDON 084 PROCEED 144 268 NC 012 RCA 010 048 117 156 067 LG 091 057 074 REALISTIC 019 056 073 075 095 MAGNAVOX 066 i un 083 085 desti dx SAMSUNG ate MITSUBISHI 017 SANSUI 040 048 110 119 065 228 NAD 088 SANYO 047 059 ONKYO 076 035 SCOTT 019 091 PANASONIC 021 042 SEARS 076 PHILIPS 066 026 094131 175 181 PIONEER 023 092 107 108 d o wem 0 SOUNDESIGN 432 PROSCAN 026 027 SOUNDSTREAM 084 088 RCA 026 027 52 068 SAM SUNG 056 070 SUMO 171 SHARP 094 TAEKWANG 138 SONY 033 TEAC 005 019 049 111 212 217 THEA TECHNICS 122 176 193 219 178 177 200 257 262 OMEGN THETA DIGITAL 136 TOSHIBA 060 087 198 278 TOSHIBA 035 034 WARDS 180 YAMAHA 042 089 YAM AHA 026 253 169 067 173 205 264 232 089 264 274 285 ZENITH 057 074091 ZENITH 143 210 C 19
104. 25 to 45dB Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing Set this parameter to 0dB for film sources and 5dB for music sources Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL and DTS ES 2 CHAN modes CNTR DLY SAMPLES Controls the relative time offset of the center channel Set this parameter to 0 unless the center channel is not properly timed and the value of the error is known Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL and DTS ES 2 CHAN modes 127 to 127 COMPRESSION AUTO ON OFF Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligi bility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources When ON full compression is applied regardless of volume level When OFF compression is not applied Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others Available in all Dolby Digital modes CTR WIDTH Adjusts the center image When set to MIN the center image is heard from just the center speaker When set to MAX the center image is heard as a phantom center image from the front left and right speakers When set on the 1 to 6 scale the center image is heard in various combinations of the front and center speakers Available in Dolby PUI MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes MIN 1 to 6 MAX CUSTOM Opens the CUSTOM menu which is used to compare custom and factory default versions of the selected listening m
105. 303 Enter the correct code Press SAVE on the right of the LCD screen to enter and save the audio code for the zone Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again C 17 Appendix Lexicon THREE DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES AUDIO Manufacturer ADC ADCOM AIWA AKAI AMC AMEND AMX ANGSTROM ARCAM AUDIO ACCESS AUDIO ALCHEMY AUDIO DESIGN AUDIO EASE AUDIO FILE AUDIO MATRIX AUDIO SOURCE AUDIO TECHNICA B amp K BOSE BRYSTON CARVER CASIO CHIRO CINEMA SOUND CITATION CLARION CURTIS MATHES DENON HGER ENLIGHTENED AUDIO Codes 007 082 092 225 161 269 018 104 170 202 203 213 211 188 138 189 125 126 127 128 258 281282 054 196 142 141 147 135 194 221011 021 196 207 071 167 273 134 096 097 070 170 224 023 006 028 061 071 201 214 226 180 185 022 029 077 284 076 140 034 134 148 272 026 076 002 034 109 215 229 230 027 037 234 259 149 057 099 098 AUDIO Manufacturer FISHER FOSGATE GE GOLDSTAR HAFLER HARMAN KARDON INKEL JBL JCPENNY JEFF ROWLAND JENSEN Jvc KENWOOD KINERGETICS KOSS KRELL KYOCERA LEXICON LINN LUXMAN LXI MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MCINTOSH MCS MERIDIAN MITSUBISHI MONDIAL MYRYAD NAD NAKAM ICHI NEC ONKYO OPTIMUS Codes 047 214 180 182 062 231 056 260 008 174 231 233 254 153 154 118 121 227 277 197 263 076
106. 4 014 061 092 141 158 004 022 136 163 213 214 242 243 C24 RV 8 Appendix C CD CD Manufacturer Codes Manufacturer Codes KENWOOD 185 007 023 055 071 072 142 137 RADIO SHACK 182 KOSS 061 RCA 017 042 150 KRELL 241 REALISTIC 042 050 051 102 181 182 187 KYOCERA 005 ROTEL 044 107 161 178 250 LOTTE 102 SAE 044 107 LUXMAN 011 028 070 076 SANSUI 044 069 107 128 171 190 125 LXI 059 SANYO 050 MAGNAVOX 044 107 SCOTT 069 102 MARANTZ 027 041 044 051 077 107 209 SHARP 026 031 051 066 MCINTOSH 212 SHERWOOD 003 019 051 096 112 115 119 166 MCS 014 073 092 SIGNATURE 033 MEMOREX 010 SONY 048 081 097 126 133 177 225 226 164 MISSION 044 107 SOUNDESIGN 251 MITSUBISHI 179 SUMO 155 MITSUMI 153 SYLVANIA 044 107 MODULAIRE 182 SYMPHONIC 052 181 MONDIAL 147 TAEKWANG 195 085 MYRYAD 244 TANDY 010 NAD 006 005 067 178 TEAC 015 034 036 051 052 101 131 140 079 KAKAMICHI 217 218 219 095 TECHNICS 060 103 200 172 184 008 068 NEC 014 062 TECHWOOD 076 NIKKO 046 THETA DIGITAL 234 235 NSM 044 107 TOSHIBA 006 067 091 160 148 ONKYO 030 038 039 168 169 VECTOR RESEARCH 080 OPTIMUS 010 050 057 058 081 082 083 085 093 195 VICTOR 004 022 114 124 PANASONIC 103 201 172 008 068 WARDS 185 033 PARASOUND 233 YAMAHA 024 046 054 186 183 245 PHILIPS 041 044 YORX 182 PIONEER 010 020 025 056 174 175 176 PROCEED 239 PROTON 044 107 228 QUASAR 103 008 C 25 Appendix Lexicon LD Manufacturer Codes DENON 206 207 FUNAI 120 KENWOOD 152 013 MAG
107. 4 028 042 SIGNATURE 072 MINERVA 088 SONY 070 085 139 147 126 185 194 MITSUBISHI 004 024 028 040 042 109 124 146 191 SOUNDESIGN 004 028 003 043 MTC 197 004 062 101 SPECTRICON 112 NAD 015 025 SSS 004 043 C 23 Appendix Lexicon TV Manufacturer SUPRE M ACY SYLVANIA TAN DY TATUNG TECHNICS TECHWOOD TEKNIKA TELEFUN KEN TELERENT TERA TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVISION UNIVERSAL VIDEO CONCEPTS VIDIKRON VIDTECH WARDS WESTING HOUSE YAMAHA YORK YUPITERU ZENITH ZONDA Codes 002 197 003 059 060 063 064 164 044 160 127 081 056 062 034 080 004 002 003 004 024 028 043 072 101 143 037 046 086 087 072 172 004 007 015 030 040 062 101 138 143 008 009 146 174 184 188 192 004 004 008 009 019 028 060 061 063 064 072 074 143 164 034 076 197 004 004 043 072 073 095 103 157 183 112 CD Manufacturer ADCOM AIWA AMEND ARCAM AUDIO ACCESS AUDIO EASE AUDIO TECHNICA BSR CALIFORNIA AUDIO CAPETRONIC CARRERA CARVER CASO CLARINETTE CREEK CROWN DENON EMERSON FISHER FRABA GENEXXA GOLDSTAR HAITAI HARMAN KARDON HITACHI INKEL JC PENNEY JENSEN Jvc Codes 062 042 059 065 088 089 105 122 170 187 085 195 202 231 232 118 238 119 147 165 046 037 057 103 008 063 057 080 185 041 044 050 086 107 130 134 135 138 139 203 204 167 111 182 182 159 035 002 123 042 069 102 050 185 134 008 111 010 069 102 080 093 018 033 047 208 042 175 130 143 14
108. 7 BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 12 RV 8 Mode Adjust PANORAMA The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and matrix encoded sources PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front speakers producing a wider stereo field with greater depth Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position and front speakers When the front speakers are positioned close to either side of the display device the effect is produced over a wider area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle from the display device Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EFFECT LVL 4dB 12 to 46dB BASS CONTENT STEREO BINAURL MONO STEREO LOW FREQ WIDTH 40 25 to 425dB SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms INPUT BALANCE lt gt OFF 1 to 30ms L to q gt to gt R CALIBRATION Refer to next column OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions PANORAMA CALIBRATION gt gt Select PANORAMA CALIBRATION to open the PANORAMA
109. AKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above will open in the on screen display 2 Pressthe or arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker distance parameter Then pressthe arrow button to select the highlighted speaker distance parameter MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES SPEAKER DISTANCES FRONT LEFT LEVELS CALIBRATION CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT TN D REAR RIGHT 0 08 0 08 0 0 REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER 000 UNITS fr an rq L wA Di 0 0ft 0 01 0 08 0 08 3 To determine the appropriate speaker distance measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front of the speaker For example when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front of the front left speaker connected to the Main 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m METERS FEET Zone audio output connector labeled Front L 4 When the speaker distance has been measured press the 4 and arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available value 3 54 RV 8 Setup PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION gt BENE TI Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below to manually calibrate output levels MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP gt LEVELS CALIBRATION MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CRO
110. ALENHANCE 0 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms LFE MIX 40 0dB DECODING AUTO OUTPUT LEVELS RE EQUALIZER LFE MIX DECODING OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM dits MUSIC LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM dts E LFE MIX s DECODING OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM gt 2 CHAN CENTER MIX 0dB SURROUND MIX 0dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 MASTER LEVEL 0dB LFE MIX 0 0dB ies DECODING AUTO SUB L R LVL 0dB CUSTOM ERER FILM VOCAL ENHANCE RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF REAR DLY OFFSET LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a MUSIC VOCAL ENHANCE 0 04 FRONT STEERING MUSIC RE EQUALIZER OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a THX RE EQUALIZER SURROUND EX LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 THX MUSIC LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a STANDARD OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1a 2 CHANNEL CENTER MIX 0dB SURROUND MIX 0dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 MASTER LEVEL 0dB LFE MIX 0 0dB SUB LEVEL 098 CUSTOM 5 1a BYPASS OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM NO PARAM H N HEADPHONES Em NO PARAMETERS HEADPHONES 5 1 NO PARAMETERS LIVE SMALL MID RT BASS RT ROLLOFF TREB CUT RT PRE DELAY ADVANCED CUSTOM LIVE SMALL ADVANCED REVERB LVL 0dB EARLY RFLXL
111. ANCED DIGITAL I ZONE2 IN Deyi p ANGL L us ZONE2 ADVANCED DMIX Parameter Possible Settings INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO ANLOG BYPASS ON OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO OFF S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON OFF COMPONENT OSD ON OFF LEGACY VIDEO A B FORMAT DETECT NORMAL FAST INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO gt Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input The INPUT SETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio input connector for the selected input The table on page 3 19 describes INPUT SELECT parameter settings Note When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO the RV 8 will not select the assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audio input source is present Some DVD and CD players output digital signals data when the player is paused or stopped or when the player is powered on and the disc drawer is empty When this occurs the RV 8 automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector 3 17 Setup Lexicon CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS continued ANALOG BYPASS ON OFF S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO OFF Em DO gt EE EaNSHZS When set to ON the RV 8 passes the analog input signal to the Main Zone audio output connectors For stereo analog sources the input is sent to the FRONT L R outputs For a
112. ART CLOSE TOGETHER B 5 Appendix Lexicon SETUP MENU SPEAKERS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP SPEAKER SETUP INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS PLACE MICROPHONES AROUND PREFERRED LISTENING POSITIONS SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICROPHONES screen pressing the arrow but ton opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu When no ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICRO PHONES screen pressing the arrow button opens the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES GROUP MICROPHONES INTO A BUNDLE IN THE MIDDLE OF THE ROOM PRESS TO BEGIN MIC CHECK CHECK MICROPHONES MIC 1 ERROR MIC 2 OK PRESS TO VIEW DETAILS PRESS TO CONTINUE CHECK MICROPHONES CHECKING FOR SILENCE PLEASE WAIT MICROPHONE NOT DETECTED or MICROPHONE SIGNAL TOO LOW or MICROPHONE OUT OF RANGE or gt _ gt MICROPHONE OK MICROPHONE TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE CHECK MICROPHONES CHECKING MICROPHONES PLEASE WAIT When
113. ATION POWER MANAGEMENT Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings MODES UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED SETUP UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED MODES LOCKED UNLOCKED Eat gt Rees gt prz Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings which includes all lis tening mode menu settings When set to LOCKED these settings cannot be adjusted When set to UNLOCKED these settings can be adjusted LOCK OPTIONS LOCKED MODES UNLOCKED gt UNLOCKED AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED SETUP UNLOCKED R AUDIO CNTRL Lock onions gt LOCKED UNLOCKED Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings When set to LOCKED these settings cannot be adjusted When set to UNLOCKED these settings can be adjusted SETUP LOCKED UNLOCKED Ex gt Controls SETUP menu branch settings When set to LOCKED these settings cannot be adjusted When set to UNLOCKED these settings can be adjusted 3 79 Setup Lexicon LIVE CALIBRATION EX gt uve caueranon UVE Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment is a proprietary mode designed to transform the way your listening room sounds LIVE uses a combination of microphones and digital signal processing DSP to enhance the room acoustics and create the illusion of a larger more reverberant listening space LIVE CALIBRATION must be completed before using any of the LIVE modes Notes You should run automatic calibration before runn
114. ATUS menu level meters 2 35 parameters 2 34 STATUS menus 2 29 SUB amp SUB LVL parameter 6 45 SUB L R LVL parameter 6 33 SUB LEVEL parameter 6 15 6 16 6 23 6 24 6 29 SUB parameter 6 37 SUBWOOFER parameter 3 29 3 33 SURR MIX LVL parameter 2 35 SURR ROLLOFF parameter 6 4 6 5 6 13 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 23 SURROUND DLY parameter 6 8 6 45 SURROUND EX parameter 6 19 6 31 6 45 SURROUND MIX parameter 6 23 6 29 6 33 6 46 S VIDEO 16 4 RV 8 Index 9 parameter 3 17 3 18 S VIDEO OSD 4 3 parameter 3 17 3 20 S Video output connectors 2 8 T three digit preprogrammed codes C 18 THX listening mode 6 18 THX MUSIC listening mode 6 19 THX SETUP Menu 3 29 THX SPEAKER SETUP screen 3 28 3 28 THX SurEX listening mode 6 18 THX UL2Cin listening mode 6 18 THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter 3 29 3 34 TILT EQ parameter 4 2 frequency response graph 4 5 TREB CUT RT parameter 6 46 TREBLE parameter 4 2 frequency response graph 4 3 trigger output connectors 2 8 TRIGGER SETUP 3 70 TRIGGER SETUP menu 3 2 troubleshooting 7 2 Troubleshooting automatic calibration 3 52 Tune Seek access 2 10 TUNE SEEK Buttons 2 5 2 5 tuner antenna connectors 2 8 tuner overview 2 10 TUNER PRESETS menu 5 2 TUNER PRESETS parameter 3 75 Tuner Regions 3 73 TUNER SETUP menu 3 3 TUNER SETUP option 3 72 Tuner status 2 29 Two line Status 2 28 2 29 U Ultra2 certified 3 34 understanding the zones 2 28 USE LAST
115. AY Circle all parameters set to ON REGION STATUS REMOTE ONLY MONO SCAN SENS DVD1 5 114 FILM POSITION DVD2 5 115 TV FORMAT SAT 5 1 rz MUSIC LOCK OPTIONS VCR BACKGROUND TV TEX MUSIC MODES FRONT PANEL DISPLAY CD 5 1 PLIIx MOV AUDIO CNTRL TUNER 5 1 PLIIx MUS STATUS PHONO DIGITAL SETUP ZONE2 INPUTS 5 1 2 CHANNEL EE ZONE3 INPUTS 5 1 MONO LOGIC A V SYNC DELAY tz FILM 5 1 MONO SURR AUDIO CONTROLS ti TV 5 1 MONO CUSTOM NAME tz MUSIC mM BASS EDIT CUSTOM NAME tz MUSIC SURR Ems rz MUSIC TREBLE PLIIX 18x ax PLIIx MOV Ems mx MUSIC TILT EQ VOLUME CONTROL SETUP PLlix MUS 19 LOUDNESS PUI E ities 2 CHAN MAIN PWR ON XI PUI MOVIE 5 1a tsi FILM BALANCE 00 PLII MUSIC 5 1 tsi MUSIC MUTE LEVEL 1 FADER 00 PL E 5 1a zx SurEX ZONE2 PWRON PRO LOGIC 5 1a EX MUSIC ZONE2 BALANCE 5 1a STANDARD ZONE 3 PWRON I ZONE3 BALANCE Emsos CIN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL HEADPHONE med USIC 5 1a BYPASS NIGHTCLUB 2CH BYPASS MAX VOLUME CONCERT HALL HEADPHONE Ii CHURCH HEADPHONE 5 1 CATHEDRAL HEADPHONE EB PANORAMA HEADPHONE 5 1a 2 CHANNEL LIVE MED MONO LOGIC LIVE LARGE MONO SURROUND D 4 RV 8 Appendix D 3 DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES WORKSHEET COMPONENT MANUFACTURER CODE S USED DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV CD PHONO D 5 Appendix D Lexicon PREPROGRAMMED LCD TEXT FOR OTHER DEVICES D
116. CALIBRATION menu shown to the left to calibrate the PANORAMA LISTENER POS listening mode This listening mode must be NOTE calibrated to take full advantage of its ENSURE THAT effects SPEAKER SETUP HAS BEEN PROPERLY PERFORMED For best results you should center the primary listening position between the front left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top of the next page Otherwise the PANORAMA listening mode will be calibrated with varying results An external calibration source is required to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode You should select a familiar stereo source Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SOURCE LEFT amp RIGHT RIGHT LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg 10 to 90deg LISTENER POS 40 127 to 4127 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Adjust Lexicon Front Right 1277 Center LEFT To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode Primary Listening Position CENTER 1 Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary listening position Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary listening position are properly measured To do this select one of the following options Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to have the RV 8 automatically calibrate speaker distan
117. CD players Sends the 5 1 channel analog audio input connector directly to the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors as shown on pages 2 9 and 3 59 These signals receive no internal processing When both side and rear speakers are present surround channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers To configure a 5 channel speaker setup set the OUTPUT LEVELS menu SIDE L R or REAR L R parameter to OFF to deactivate the associated surround speakers Pressing the remote control HOME MAIN AGE2 A BYP then 2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 Note Speaker crossover settings speaker distances and audio tone controls are not available when the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is activated 6 33 Adjust Lexicon 2CH BYPASS This listening mode sends 2 channel analog audio input signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R with no internal processing The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated whenever a 2 channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO Pressing the remote control HOME MAIN PAGE2 A BYP button
118. CHANNEL This mode recommended for recording purposes is designed for converting 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded input sources into 2 channel Logic 7 encoded output signals The downmixed 5 1 channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to the Front L R speakers and subwoofer Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER MIX 0dB 25 to 45dB SURROUND MIX 0dB 5 to 45dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 40 127 to 4127 MASTER LEVEL 40dB 5 to 45dB COM PRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 20 0 to 40 0dB SUB LEVEL 40dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1 MONO LOGIC i This listening mode designed for playback of Dolby Digital encoded mono sources uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realisti cally expand mono sources to use all channels This dramatically increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the listening space Note that When a 1 0 Dolby Digital source is present the RV 8 automatically activates the 5 1 MONO LOGIC listening mode Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EFFECT LVL 9dB 12 to 6dB ACADEMY FILTER ON ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 23
119. CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP TUNER PRESETS PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4 TUNER PRESETS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Each tuner preset page allows up to 10 preset stations MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP L lt BALANCE gt k AUDIO CONTROLS BASS TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS BALANCE FADER ZONE2 BALANCE ZONE3 BALANCE 0 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB OFF lt l gt lt l gt lt l gt lt l gt EDIT PRESET 1 FREQUENCY BAND LISTEN TO PRESET CLEAR PRESET EDIT STATION NAME t BUTTONS TO EDIT UP TO 8 CHARACTERS BUTTON TO ADVANCE STATION Dome LOADED PRESS TO CLEAR PRESET EAR NER c RE MEC ce a Ga ec ce SUME TDI E E E A 1 p u es Se eee I 1 I ON 3 0 to 3 0dB 6 0 to 6 0dB OFF 2 B 12 RV 8 Appendix B MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP These listening mode names differ depend ing on the current input source speaker setup and parameter settings Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions for more information 11 MUSIC 11 MUSIC SURR KI PLIIx Tx TI PLIIx MOV KI PLIIx MUS Tex KI PUI MOVIE TI PUI MUSIC mx II PRO LOGIC NIGHTCLUB
120. DTS L7 modes INPUT BALANCE PANORAMA LFE MIX All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 SURR 5 1 MONO all DTS modes and 5 1a BYPASS LISTENER POS PANORAMA CALIBRATION LIVENESS NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL LOW FREQ WIDTH PANORAMA MASTER LEVEL 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN MID RT CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes OUTPUT LEVELS All except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes PANORAMA Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC PRE DELAY NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes RE EQUALIZER L7 FILM L7 TV Dolby PLII THX Dolby PLIIx THX 5 1 L7 FILM 5 1 L7 TV THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX DTS ES L7 FILM DTS ES THX ULTRA2 and DTS ES THX REAR DLY OFFSET All L7 modes and PANORAMA REAR L R All except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes RESET MODE All modes REVERB LVL All LIVE modes ROLLOFF NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes SHAPE All LIVE modes SIDE L R All except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes 6 48 RV 8 Mode Adjust The parameter Is used in these modes SIZE NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes SOUND STAGE All L7 modes SOURCE PANORAMA CALIBRATION SPEAKER ANGLE PANORAMA CALIBRATION SPEECH DETECT NIGHTCLUB
121. DVD2 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 COAX 2 TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SAT ANALOG IN 3 SETUP DISPLAYS VCR ANLG IN LVL AUTO COAX 4 VOLUME CONTROLS TV VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 OPTICAL 1 TRIGGER 1 OPTICAL 2 TUNER SETUP TUNER 2 CH FILM OPTICAL 3 LOCK OPTIONS PHONO I 5 11 1 OPTICAL 4 LIVE CALIBRATION Ene ities GiFILM NONE POWER MANAGEMENT 5 1 5 1a WI FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that DIGITAL IN COAX 1 TO 4 OPTICAL 1 TO 4 NONE can be used to assign audio and video input connectors The ANLG IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2 channel analog audio input gt 4 PNR ICES aS purs Opens the DIGITAL IN menu which is used to assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input The RV 8 has eight config Parameter Possible Settings urable inputs each of which can be assigned to any of its eight digital DIGITAL IN COAX 1 to 4 OPTICAL 1 to 4 NONE audio input connectors ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 to 8 5 1 ANLG 3 5 or 6 8 PHONO TUNER NONE LIVE ANLG IN LVL AUTO 18dB to 12dB When no digital audio input connector is assigned the RV 8 will VIDEO IN COMPOSITE to 5 S VIDEO 1 to 5 NONE automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG see page 3 17 COMPONENT IN COMPONENT 1 to 3 VIDEO NONE Please note the following A digital audio
122. E INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE jew ENCODING dB L C R SLSR 0 6 302 45 Refer to the Status M enus section that begins on page 2 29 for more information 5 1a BYPASS STATUS STATUS INPUT MODE CHANNELS BIT RATE EX ENCODED R SLSR 0 6 308 ne 45 2CH BYPASS STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE Refer to the Restoring Factory Default Settings section that begins on page 7 4 for more information P D STATUS SAMPLE RATE 2 0 ENCODING DIALOG OFFSET MIX ROOM CENTER MIX LVL SURR MIX LVL DIGITAL STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE SAMPLE RATE B 17 Appendix Remote Control 2 2 C 2 Three Digit Preprogrammed Codes C 18 Appendix Lexicon REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING The RV 8 remote control has been designed to provide a new standard in remote control technology offering a very powerful and flexible preprogrammed and learning product The RV 8 remote control can operate up to 10 home entertainment and home automation components by using the preprogrammed code library in the remote control by teaching up to 530 commands into the RV 8 remote from your original remote controls or a combination of both The RV 8 remote has many additional operating features to add convenience and enjoyment to the operation of any home entertai
123. EFAULT NAME PRESS MENU TO RESTORE INPUT NAME lt EDIT INPUT NAME DVD1 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT UP TO 8 CHARACTERS BUTTON TO ADVANCE DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 COAX 2 COAX 3 COAX 4 OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 OPTICAL 4 NONE k d L d SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT DVD1 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ANALOG 5 ANALOG 6 ANALOG 7 ANALOG 8 PHONO TUNER NONE LIVE The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configu ration of the analog audio input connectors Refer to page 3 8 for more information DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO moe MANUAL L AUTO GAIN EUL 3 BL R I 0 gt 6 15 45 INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 DIGITAL ANLG DMIX DVD1 VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 COMPOSITE 2 COMPOSITE 3 COMPOSITE 4 COMPOSITE 5 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 2 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 4 S VIDEO 5 NONE DVD1 COMPONENT COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 3 VIDEO ON OFF 18 to 12dB Indicates the current amount of analog audio input level adjust ment for the selected analog audio input connector This parameter cannot be adjusted DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 2 CH 9
124. ELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES continued dts Go UTU ETUI Opens the DTS ES MODE menu which is used to select a preferred listening mode for DTS ES input sources The RV 8 automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or anew DTS ES source is present When the DTS ES parameter is set to USE LAST RV activates the listening mode that was activated the last time a DTS ES source was present The RV 8 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it was activated the last time a DTS ES source was present Since DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS ES sources MIC EY gt I gt EZ Opens the MIC MODE menu which is used to select a preferred listening mode for the LIVE source The RV 8 automatically activates the preferred listening mode when a LIVE input is selected When the MIC parameter is set to USE LAST The RV 8 activates the listening mode LIVE SMALL LIVE MED or LIVE LARGE that was activated the last time a MIC source was present 5 la Em Is gt En Opens the 5 1 MODE menu which is used to select a preferred listening mode for 5 1 channel analog sources The RV 8 automatically activates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5 1 channel analog source is present When the 5 1a parameter is set to USE LAST The RV 8 activates the 5 1 channel analog l
125. ERVIEW The RV 8 remote control provides full operation of the RV 8 including commands such as menu navigation that are not available from the front panel It is also designed to provide control for the entire home theater system This section provides a brief overview of the remote control For detailed operation programming instructions and manufacturing codes refer to Appendix C OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS The following factors can improve or impede remote control operation Note the following before operating the RV 8 remote control Theremote control must be in line of sight with the front panel IR receiver Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the IR receiver The remote control may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver For optimal performance position the remote control at a 30 degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet 12 2m to 18 3m from the RV 8 Placing the RV 8 inside a smoked glass cabinet will reduce the remote control range Remote controls for different components can interfere with one another Avoid using remote controls for different compo nents at the same time Remote control batteries should be replaced as needed 2 14 RV 8 Basic Operation MAIN MENU MENU ITEM SELECTION Use the MAIN MENU to open the four main Use the remote control Menu arrows to navigate menus and to menu branches MODE ADJUST AUDIO s
126. ETUP INPUTS DVD1 SPEAKERS DVD2 1 0 CONFIG SAT DISPLAYS VCR AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT ANLG IN LVL gt Ez gt EES Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu which is used to adjust the 2 channel analog audio input levels for the selected input Despite attempts at standardization analog audio sources have a wide range of levels To compensate for this the RV 8 allows independent input level adjustment for each of its stereo and multichannel analog audio input connectors phono input and the internal tuner Input level adjustment is not available when analog bypass is on AUTO 18dB to 12dB Parameter Possible Settings AUTO ON OFF MANUAL 18 to 12dB AUTO GAIN 18 to 12dB This parameter cannot be adjusted b DVD1 INPUT SETUP DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOGIN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 DVD1 ANLG IN LVL ON AUTO OFF MANUAL 18 to 12dB DVD1 AUTO GAIN 0 0dB BL R 0 6 H 30 E 1 FILM 5 115 FILM ats SjFILM 5 1a Ii FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED 45 Note Adjustments made in the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the analog audio input connector assigned for the selected input these adjustments are automatically applied to the new connector Setup Lexicon ASSIGNING AUD
127. FF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM 500HZ to 20kHz OFF OFF 1ms to 30ms AUTO ON OFF 10 0dB to 0 0dB Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 17 Adjust Lexicon THX THX UL2Cin amp THX SurEX on These modes are designed for 7 channel playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital film sources that do not have THX Surround EX encoding They apply THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equal ization THX timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them These modes are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the Speaker setup The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when activated The THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and THX ULTRA2 decoding is engaged THX Ultra2 decoding is
128. GGER SETUP menu which is used to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 See TRIGGER SETUP on page 3 70 for more information RV 8 Setup TUNER SETUP POWER MANAGEM ENT ON OFF ES Em Opens the TUNER SETUP menu which is used to configure the AM FM tuner See TUNER SETUP on page 3 72 for more information LOCK OPTIONS EX Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu which is used to protect MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from accidental changes For more information see Lock Options on page 3 79 LIVE CALIBRATION EX Opens the LIVE CALIBRATION menu which is used to perform the necessary calibration before using the LIVE modes See LIVE CALIBRATION on page 3 80 for more information Opens the POWER MANAGEMENT menu which is used to automat ically put the RV 8 into standby mode during brownouts When set to ON the RV 8 detects low voltage levels or a momentary loss of power and puts the device in standby mode In the event of a power brown out the RV 8 will display a BROWN OUT PRESS STANDBY message To turn the unit back on use the front panel STAN DYBY button When set to OFF the RV 8 will attempt to function during a momentary power loss however software settings may become corrupt and need to be reset When the RV 8 is in standby mode pressing the button turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previous operating session 3 3 Setup
129. Hz SIDE L R 80Hz FULL FULL 4 SUB 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz REAR L R 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz NONE SUBWOOFER 80Hz FULL 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF BGC ON OFF ON OFF ASA APART APART CLOSE TOGETHER APART APART CLOSE TOGETHER These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu t When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF the BGC parameter is not available N A 3 29 Setup Lexicon SPEAKER SETUP PARAM ETERS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP SPEAKER SETUP INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SUBWOOFE REAR L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL 30Hz FULL SUB 40Hz 30Hz 50 2 40Hz 60 2 50 2 70 2 60 2 80Hz 70Hz THX 80Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz THX 80 2 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP SIDE L R SPEAKERS FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70 2 80Hz THX 80 Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE CENTER SPEAKER FULL FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R CENTER SIDE L R REAR L R SUBWOOFER THXULTRA2 SUB BGC ASA FRONT L R SPEAKERS FUL
130. IO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS continued AUTO ON OFF E gt gt E gt Exc Provides automatic adjustment of analog audio input levels When set to ON the RV 8 automatically monitors and optimizes input levels When the input signal is too high the RV 8 quickly decreases input levels to avoid overload When the input signal is too low the RV 8 slowly increases input levels to maximize signal to noise ratio and dynamic range When OFF is selected the RV 8 does not automatically monitor and optimize analog audio input levels Rather input levels must be adjusted with the MANUAL parameter see below MANUAL 18dB to 12dB EZ v gt EXE gt LESEN Provides manual adjustment of analog audio input levels When manual adjustments are made the RV 8 automatically sets the ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF deactivating automatic input level adjustment Manual input level adjustments are retained when the AUTO parameter is ON Note When the AUTO parameter is ON the RV 8 will not make adjustments that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting AUTO GAIN E373 gt EX gt Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the selected analog audio input connector When the ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter is ON the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of automatic input level adjustment When the AUTO parameter is OFF the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates t
131. L FULL SUB 30Hz 40Hz 50Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 80 Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 3 30 RV 8 Setup FRONT L R FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120HZ THX 80HZ Eat gt EZYGZ gt gt Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Opensthe FRONT L R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the Front L R output connectors Select FULL to send a full range signal to the front speakers Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the front speakers Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the front speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass REISS gt ES gt EESTI P gt When THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the Front L R output connectors and the FRONT L R parameter cannot be adjusted CENTER FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120HZ THX 80HZ NONE EX gt EIS gt Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected Opens the CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER output connector Select FULL to send a full range
132. LIED ORIGINAL LEVELS APPLIED SPEAKER B 8 RV 8 Appendix B MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER UNITS SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT METERS FEET 0 0 to 30 0ft or 12 0m SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION AN 60Hz INTERNAL NOISE CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST EXTERNAL NOISE TEST BASS PEAK LIMITER BASS PEAK LIMITER CAL NOISE ON LIMITER ON LIMIT ADJ 100dB SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST FRONT LEFT 0 0dB CENTER 0 0dB FRONT RIGHT 0 0dB SIDE RIGHT 0 0dB REAR RIGHT 0 0dB REAR LEFT 0 0dB SIDE LEFT 0 0dB SUBWOOFER 0 0dB CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS L L x L Z 18 10 12dB amp 1 75 to 120dB en ON OFF B 9 Appendix Lexicon SETUP MENU I O CONFIG MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS 1 0 CONFIG ANALOG INPUTS AMP OUTPUTS REAR PANEL CONFIG
133. M ti MUSIC ti MUSIC SURR KI THX KI PLIIx MOV KI PUIx MUS KI PLII THX KI PLII MOVIE KI PUI MUSIC II PL THX KI PRO LOGIC THX comes m MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HHALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 FILM 5 1 MUSIC IEZ SurEX MUSIC 5 1 MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO FILM TRIGGER SETUP ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TRIGGER SETUP _ Cts nx ENE MUSIC aes 25 Cities 2 CHAN 5 1a t FILM 5 1a fa MUSIC 5 1a T SurEX 5 1a Tax MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS HEADPHONE 1 HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE 22188 HEADPHONE 5 1 LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode names are fixed meaning these names do not change when certain encoding is present For instance the 5 1 THX SurEX listening mode label appears whether THX Ultra2 THX Sur round EX or no encod ing is engaged 3 70 RV 8 Setup PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS ON OFF EZ Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for program operation All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters except the REM OTE ONLY parameter are considered program operation parameters The connector c
134. MATIC MANUAL I I SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING L MIC CHECK REQUIRED FOR AUTO CALIBRATION AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES LEVELS OK OK 1 1 AUTO VALUES APPLIED PRESS VIEW I DETAILS 1 1 1 1 LEVELS OK ah DISTANCES OK AUTO LEVELS FRONT LEFT FRONT RIGHT 1 E EIE REAR RIGHT L REAR LEFT L L SUBWOOFER x gt SPEAKER OK or AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES amp LEVELS DISTANCES OUTPUT LEVELS PLACE MICROPHONES AROUND PREFERRED LISTENING POSITIONS AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES ERROR LEVELS ERROR AUTO VALUES APPLIED PRESS TO VIEW DETAILS AUTO SPEAKER SETUP YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH AUTO DISTANCES P AUTO SPEAKER SETUP CAUTION TEST WILL BEGIN IN HIGH AUDIO LEVELS 10 PRESS TO SKIP COUNTDOWN SIT QUIETLY PRESS TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN When the RV 8 is finished calibrating speaker dis tances and output levels the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown at the left will open in the on screen display indicating the results for each calibration procedure If there is an error press the a arrow button to highlight the desired calibration procedure Then press the arrow button to select this procedure Selecting DISTANCES opens the AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below Selecti
135. MAXVOLUME 1208 LAST LVL 80 to 124 10dB 20dB 30dB 40dB FULL TUNER SETUP REGION SCAN SENS AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT ON SCROLLRATE AUTO FREQUENCY ON continued on page B 14 LOCK OPTIONS MODES UNLOCKED AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED SETUP UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED LIVE CALIBRATION CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLY PRESS gt TO BEGIN COUNTDOWN continued on page B 14 TRIGGER SETUP REMOTE ONLY DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR cD TUNER PHONO ZONE2 INPUTS ZONE3 INPUTS Isi FILM Bi TV Isi MUSIC Isi MUSIC SURR 0 PLIIx TI MOV TI PLIIx MUS 85 XI PLII MOVIE 0 PLII MUSIC PL mx PRO LOGIC ONEN THX CIN Cte MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 51 5 1 i TV 5 1 MUSIC IEZ SurEX MUSIC 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR TRIGGER SETUP ex En MUSIC Cities 2 CHAN 5 1a tsi FILM 5 1 ma MUSIC 5 1 T SurEX 5 1a MUSIC 5 1a STANDARD 5 1a 2 CHANNEL 5 1a BYPASS 2CH BYPASS HEADPHONE 1 HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE E HEADPHONE 5 1a LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE
136. MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED DVD1 MIC MODE LIVE SMALL LIVE MED LIVE LARGE USE LAST DVD1 OO D MODE 5 154 FILM 5 1 ITV 5 1 IMUSIC THX DIGITAL 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO SURR 5 1 MONO HEADPHONE 5 1 USE LAST DVD1 2 CH MODE 1 FILM E TV 191 MUSIC WI MUSIC SURR PLII EX DOPLII MOVIE OOPLII MUSIC THX DO PRO LOGIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAM A 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO HEADPHONE 1 USE LAST 3 12 RV 8 Setup When a preferred listening mode is selected that listening mode is automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an appropriate input source is present For example the following can occur when a preferred listening mode is activated also refer to the corresponding menus on 3 12 If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2 channel source is played the L7 FILM listening mode is activated If a Dolby Digital source is played the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated If a DTS ES source is played the DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode is activated Dynamic Listening Modes Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions For example many of the dynamic modes are only available when the RV 8 is configured for seven main output channels and source material with specific encoding is played All Dynamic Listening Modes are available through the remo
137. MODE ADJUST continued RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF REAR DLY OFFSET COMPRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 Ij TV VOCAL ENHANCE FRONT STEERING RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF REAR DLY OFFSET COMPRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 1 VOCALENHANCE 40 FRONT STEERING RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF 0dB MUSIC OFF NEUTRAL ON OFF 7 0kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION LFE MIX 0 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM THX RE EQUALIZER SURROUND EX COMPRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM OFF 0dB T MUSIC COM PRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 PLIIx MOV EX DECODING COM PRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 PLIIx MUS EX DECODING COM PRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM KI DIGITAL EX DECODING COMPRESSION LFE MIX OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 2 CHANNEL CENTER MIX 0dB SURROUND MIX 0dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 0 MASTER LEVEL 098 COM PRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB SUB LEVEL 098 CUSTOM 5 1 MONO LOGIC EFFECT LVL 9dB ACADEMY FI8LTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 3 1 2 OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 MONO SURR OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 5 1 MONO SUB LEVEL CUSTOM dts VOCAL ENHANCE RE EQUALIZER SOUND STAGE 5 SPKR ENHANCE BASS ENHANCE SURR ROLLOFF REAR DLY OFFSET LFE MIX DECODING OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM 0 0dB ats SWS VOC
138. NAGEMENT INPUTS E gt Prompts the selection of a desired input e g DVD1 and opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu which is used to change input names assign audio and video input connectors select preferred listening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings See INPUT SETUP on page 3 4 for more information SPEAKERS E gt BETES Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu which is used to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup set speaker distances and calibrate output levels See SPEAKER SETUP on page 3 25 for more information I O CONFIG E373 gt Opens the I O CONFIG menu which is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors one 5 1 channel and five stereo connectors or two stereo and two 5 1 channel connectors It can also be used to configure the amplifier outputs See I O CONFIGURATION 3 60 for more information DISPLAYS E373 gt Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu which is used to customize the on screen and front panel displays restore audio video synchronization and create and activate a custom unit name See DISPLAY SETUP on page 3 63 for more information VOLUME CONTROLS ES Opensthe VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu which is used to configure Main Zone Mute Zone 2 Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels See VOLUME CONTROL SETUP on page 3 68 for more information TRIGGER EX Opens the TRI
139. NAVOX 032 121 MARANTZ 211 MITSUBISHI 121 NAD 121 OPTIMUS 049 013 PANASONIC 113 PHILIPS 032 PIONEER 106 117 121 RADIO SHACK 120 RCA 002 REALISTIC 049 RUNCO 127 SANYO 075 SHARP 152 013 SONY 053 110 TECHNICS 113 THETA DIGITAL 032 TOSHIBA 152 106 043 129 Note The LD codes are stored in DVD PHONO Manufacturer 3M AIWA ARCHER AUTON DMX DRAPER SCREEN DWIN EVERQUEST EXTRON FAROUDJA FUJI JERROLD Jc KENWOOD LITEETOUCH LUTRON MAKITA MINDPATH NILES NSM PIANO DISC PLUS PHILIPS POLK AUDIO REPLAY RUSSOUND SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA SIMA SOLO ELECTRONICS SOMFY SONY STARCOM TURBOSCAN VELODYNE X 10 XANTECH Codes 152 164 155 191 156 204 080 206 151 184 209 153 185 185 208 077 158 159 186 201 205 160 187 161 085 090 162 075 081 156 163 082 207 078 079 104 164 165 166 153 167 203 093 183 168 169 170 171 172 188 189 C 26 RV 8 Appendix C CABLE CABLE Manufacturer Codes Manufacturer Codes ABC 103 003 004 039 042 046 053 OAK 031 037 053 AMERICAST 099 PANASONIC 044 047 ANTRONIX 014 PARAGON 052 ARCHER 005 007 014 PHILIPS 006 012 013 020 085 095 BELL SOUTH 099 PIONEER 103 034 051 063 076 105 CENTURION 092 PRUCER 059 CENTURY 007 RCA 047 CITIZEN 007 RECOTON 098 COMBANO 080 081 REGAL 049 050 COMSAT 074 REGENCY 057 COMTRONICS 030 SAMSUNG 030 DIGICABLE 101 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 003 011 041 042 043 045 046 EAGLE 020 030 040 SIGNAL 030 EASTERN
140. NE Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is MATRIX a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is detected When the parameter setting is NONE a standard 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected The RV 8 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged input sources 2 34 RV 8 Basic Operation INPUT Indicates the selected input e g DVD1 INPUT TYPE ANLG BYP PCM MIC Indicates the input source that is present When the parameter setting is ANLG a 2 channel analog audio source is present and the MAIN ADV menu 2 CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF When the parameter setting is BYP Bypass a 2 channel analog audio source is present and the 2 CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON When the parameter setting is PCM a 2 channel digital audio source is present When the parameter is set to MIC a microphone source is present When the parameter setting is an unknown digital audio source is present MIX ROOM SMALL LARGE Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the mixing process When the parameter setting is LARGE setting the RE EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes is recommended MODE Indicates the activated listening mode e g L7 FILM SAM PLE RATE 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz
141. NFIG menu 5 ST amp 5 1 ANLG option is selected see page 3 61 The ANALOG IN menu C above appears when the 1 CONFIG menu 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG option is selected see page 3 61 MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ZONE2 ADVANCED DVD1 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ANALOG 5 ANALOG 6 DVD1 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ANALOG 5 PHONO 5 1 ANLG 6 8 TUNER PHONO NONE TUNER LIVE DVD1 ANALOG IN ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 5 1 ANLG 3 5 5 1 ANLG 6 8 DVD1 1 NONE AUTO 1 Iri FILM ANALOG 7 ANALOG 8 PHONO TUNER LIVE NONE LIVE DIGITAL ANALOG 1 to 8 5 1 ANLG 3 5 or 6 8 PHONO TUNER NONE LIVE Please note the following When no analog audio input connector is assigned the RV 8 automatically sets the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL see page 3 17 An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no digital audio input connector is assigned Refer to the previous page for information about assigning a digital audio input connector The PHONO connector The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM FM radio tuner LIVE cannot be selected until LIVE CALIBRATION is run When the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE the digital input selection is disabled for this input until a different analog input is selected input corresponds to the built in phono RV 8 Setup MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUT S
142. On button to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV 8 Quickly press and hold the front panel or remote control Mute button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the on screen and front panel displays Press the remote control and arrow buttons to highlight the desired option Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to restore factory default settings Highlight the EXIT option to close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory default settings When the desired option is highlighted press the remote control arrow button to select this option f the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected the FACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous page will appear in the on screen and front panel displays When this message appears press a front panel or remote control button to restart the RV 8 Ifthe EXIT option is selected the FACTORY SETTINGS menu will close and the two line status will open in the on screen and front panel displays Appendix Specifications e 2 Declaration of Conformity A 4 Appendix Lexicon SPECIFICATIONS Main Zone Audio Performance Audio Input amp Output Connectors Input Sensitivity 200mV Rms 2V Rms for maximum output level at OdB input gain Analog Audio Inputs Eight stereo RCA or five stereo and one 5 1 channel or 2 stereo and two 5 1 channel connectors Input Impedan
143. Otherwise Main Zone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level Z2 PWR ON SETUP gt VOLUME contRoLS gt Zone Pwr on Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 is activated When set to LAST LVL Zone 2 activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous operating session LAST LVL is displayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone 2 Off button on the remote control or front panel LAST LVL 80 to 12dB 3 68 RV 8 Setup Z3 PWRON ESI gt RMI gt Sets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 is activated When set to LAST LVL Zone 3 activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous operating session LAST LVL is displayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone 3 Off button on the remote control or front panel LAST LVL 80 to 12dB HEADPHONE EX Sets the Headphone volume level that will be selected whenever headphones are plugged in to the RV 8 When set to LAST LVL the LAST LVL 80 to 12dB headphones will activate at the last volume level that was selected when they were last plugged in When the headphones are unplugged the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting MAX VOLUME Is gt DENS Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone When a value is selected the RV 8 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the selected value when the cu
144. P TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT Note the following The RV 8 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and 95dB beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments until the microphones detect the required level If the calibration noise signal becomes too loud press the arrow button to cancel the microphone check Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volume level you should set all volume controls for associated compo nents i e speakers subwoofers and power amplifiers to a reasonable level before performing automatic calibration When the procedure is finished the RV 8 automatically reverts to the last volume level that was selected before automatic calibration began During automatic calibration you should refer to the on screen display instead of the front panel display as additional infor mation and instructions are available in the on screen display Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option as shown above SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES CHECK MICROPHONES GROUP MICROPHONES INTO A BUNDLE IN THE AUTOMATIC MIDDLE OF THE ROOM PRESS BEGIN SET CROSSOVERS MIC CHECK BEFORE CALIBRATING 2 The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on screen display indicating the importance of proper microphone placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results Press the arrow button to begin
145. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode ERASE MACRO FUNCTIONS FROM DEVICE BUTTONS To erase macro function from device buttons 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen Press the MACRO button Press the KEY button Press one of the 10 DEVICE buttons from which you wish to erase the macro function Once the device button has been pushed the macro has been erased The LCD will flash ERASED 6 Exit from Macro mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOM E button once again gt ERASING PUNCH THROUGH FUNCTIONS To erase punch through functions 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen Press the VOL button for Volume Punch Through the PLA button for Transport Punch Through or the CH button for Channel Punch Through Press the device button from which you wish to erase Punch Through Press the same device button again Punch through is erased when the same device button is pressed the second time Repeat from step 2 to erase the Punch Through for other devices Exit from Punch Through mode by pressing the HOM E button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again EDIT TEXT ON FUNCTION DEVICE BUTTONS To edit text
146. R MANAGEMENT AUTO FREQUENCY EX Checks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop out or signal fade The default setting is ON Many radio stations broadcast on several frequencies simultaneously When active AUTO FREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts when signal failure is detected ON OFF If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received TUNER SETUP ON REGION OFF SCAN SENS AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT ON SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTO FREQUENCY ON AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency when the following conditions are met The main frequency signal starts to fade The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exact match of the currently selected frequency The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strength than the currently selected frequency e AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON 3 78 RV 8 Setup LOCK OPTIONS gt Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu which is used to protect MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBR
147. RATION COUNTDOWN POWER M ANAGEM ENT PRESS TO CONTINUE LIVE CALIBRATION SIGNAL TOO LOW PRESS TO CONTINUE To perform LIVE calibration The CALIBRATION DONE message indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure ty areas ee ee ae The SIGNAL TOO LOW message indicates that the micro 2 The CAUTION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message appears to indicate phones failed to pick up sufficient calibration noise signals that the RV 8 generates loud calibration noise signals during LIVE for calibration to complete calibration If the signals become too loud press the 4 button to 4 After reading the message press gt to continue cancel LIVE calibration Pressthe button to begin calibration eras 2 52 If the SIGNAL TOO LOW message appears 3 The countdown display notifies you that LIVE calibration begins in ge app 10 seconds The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration microphones are properly connected to the RV 8 in micro begins If you choose to remain in the room your movements phone inputs 1 and 2 and that microphone cable plugs are nis fully inserted for a solid connection could affect the calibration results If you leave the room you can return in about 3 minutes the calibration procedure should be e Examine the speakers and the associated amplif
148. RESET y cusrom vs PRESET Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode When PRESET is selected the listening mode is heard in its factory default condition as if all listening mode menu parameters were set to their factory default settings When CUSTOM is selected the listening mode is heard in its custom condition including all current listening mode menu parameter settings The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to their factory default settings Note The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode menu parameter settings CUSTOM PRESET CUSTOM CUSTOM VS PRESET RESET MODE To toggle between the custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode 1 Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUS TOM VS PRESET drop down menu 2 When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop down menu is open press the remote control and arrow buttons to toggle between the PRESET factory default and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode 3 When finished pressthe arrow button to close the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop down menu 6 37 Adjust Lexicon RESET MODE Ere gt gt Ec gt Restores the factory default version of the selected list
149. RNAL NOISE TEST Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment EXTERNAL NOISE TEST Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source BASS PEAK LIMITERS Provides amplitude limits for low frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer and low frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors Protects speakers against input sources that produce low frequency signal peaks 3 53 Setup Lexicon PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION Si gt gt D gt ED Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu to manually calibrate speaker distances MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC SETUP DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT To manually calibrate speaker distances 1 Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPE
150. RV 8 01 06 dNOY9 AL1VIO3dS NVINHVH NOILVHLSIDSY L9nGOHd 6986 06 10 VW 79 o gt Ee 2 gt Uu lt gt o m o o m m m o r gt o o z E v m 2 2 2 gt TIVIN SSANISNG qaniv 31 AHVSS3O3N 39V1SOd ON exicon H A Harman International Company SALVLS G3LINN 3 Oak Park Drive Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0490 www harmanspecialtygroup com Customer Service 781 280 0300 Sales Fax 781 280 0495 Service Fax 781 280 0499 Product Shipments 16 Progress Road Billerica MA 01821 5730 USA Part No 070 15838 Rev 1 01 06
151. S DTS ES Neo 6 and DTS 96 24 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Copyright 1996 2003 Digital Theater Systems Inc All rights reserved Manufactured under license from THX Ltd U S patent numbers 5 043 970 5 189 703 and or 5 222 059 European patent number 0323830 Other U S and foreign patents pending Ultra2 and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of THX Ltd Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Used under authorization SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics Inc SHARC is a Trademark of Analog Devices Inc Hammerhead is a trademark of Analog Devices Inc Lexicon Logic 7 and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman Intemational Industries Inc U S Patent Nos D454 553 D454 860 5 796 844 5 870 480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending Lexicon LIVE is a trademark of Harman Interna tional Industries Inc 2006 Harman Intemational Industries Incorporated All rights reserved This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group The information it contains is subject to change without notice Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this document Introduction Lexicon DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS This document contains general safety installation and operation instructions for the RV 8 Receiver It is important to read this user guide before attempting to use the product Pay particular atte
152. SSOVERS SPEAKER DISTANCES INTERNAL NOISE TEST AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES LEVELS CALIBRATION EXTERNAL NOISE TEST TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC BASS PEAK LIMITERS SETUP DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS 4 TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING INTERNAL NOISE SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST LOCK OPTIONS CAUTION FRONT LEFT 0 0dB KIP LIVE CALIBRATION HIGH AUDIO LEVELS CENTER 0 09 POWER MANAGEMENT FRONT RIGHT 0 0dB ome SIDE RIGHT 40 008 REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT 40 0dB SIDE LEFT i SUBWOOFER 0 00 18 0 to 12 0dB Note the following Use a Sound Pressure Level SPL meter to manually calibrate Output levels for speakers that are not included the speaker output levels A SPL meter is a device that measures the relative setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test These loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output level output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test but calibration SPL meters are available from electronic retailers there is no need to do so such as Radio Shack Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening position placing the SPL meter at the approximate location where the listener s head will be during listening 3 55 Setup Lexicon INTERNAL NOISE TEST EST gt IT gt SESE gt Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page which indicat
153. Setup SPEAKER SETUP Ea gt BEG Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup The Main Zone includes eight audio output connectors labeled Front L R Center Subwoofer Side L R and Rear L R MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS E gt Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option opens the CROSSOVER SETUP menu which is used to configure a custom or THX setup gt SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING Note CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP rq R VANS 80Hz 80Hz e M Fx 57 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or LIVE Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated out put levels and will invalidate the LIVE calibration 3 25 Setup Lexicon CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opensthe CUSTOM SETUP menu which assigns independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output connector Possible crossover settings include FULL FULL SUB and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hz range The graphs shown on the next page indicate
154. TUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again There are five pages of LCD screens for favorite channel programming Scroll to other pages by pressing the PAGE or FAV button In the Favorite Channels macro the following buttons can be used 0 9 ENTER DISPLAY POWER SYSTEM OFF and INFO PAUSE Note To make even more powerful FAV macros codes can be learned from original remote s to the 0 9 ENTER DISPLAY POWER SYSTEM OFF and IN FO PAUSE buttons in any device and used in your FAV macros This will not work if a preprogrammed device code has been applied to those buttons For example some TVs require a code be sent after the digits other than the ENTER code in order to change channels In this case you could learn the proper code to the ENTER button from your original TV remote and use that in your FAV macro C 9 Appendix Lexicon PROGRAMMING MACRO BUTTONS A macro isa series of commands that can be sent with the push of a single button There are two types of macro functions that can be programmed functions involving the M1 M2 and M3 buttons or functions involving the POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons Each of these buttons is designed to send up to 20 commands The 10 device buttons can also send a macro of up to 20 commands when the device button is pressed for more than one second while on the HOME page of the remote control Note If the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons are programmed with a macro they will
155. UB BGC 0 202 c These parameters cannot be adjusted THX ULTRA2 SUB ON OFF am gt v or Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2 certified Select the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2 certified and the OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2 certified When ESI gt gt gt gt set to ON the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter can be used to adjust boundary gain compensation When set to OFF the BGC parameter is not available N A 3 34 RV 8 Setup BGC BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION Em EZE y gt Ea EX gt GEIS v Thx serur gt Ea Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON When the BGC parameter is set to ON a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to all audio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes When set to OFF no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audio output connectors When the parameter setting is N A the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF and boundary gain compen sation cannot be adjusted ON OFF Note BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls ASA ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY APART CLOSE TOGETHER EJ gt gt
156. UT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory default parameter settings for each input 3 4 RV 8 Setup CHANGING INPUT NAMES Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the IN PUT NAM E menu which is used to customize or restore the factory default name of the selected input Factory default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection button labels MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP INPUT SETUP INPUTS DVD1 SPEAKERS DVD2 1 0 CONFIG SAT DISPLAYS VCR VOLUME CONTROLS TV DVD1 INPUT SETUP DVD1 INPUT NAME NAME DVD1 EDIT INPUT NAME DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOGIN NONE 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT ANLG IN LVL AUTO UP TO 8 CHARACTERS VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 BUTTON TO ADVANCE COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH 1 FILM P 5 1153 FILM Ene ities GiFILM 5 1 5 1 1 FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED b EDIT INPUT NAME DVD1 RESTORE DEFAULT NAME TUNER PRESETS SETUP TRIGGER CD TUNER SETUP TUNER LOCK OPTIONS PHONO LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT EDIT INPUT NAME E gt EX X SE Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop down menu which is used to automatically wrap to the first character space when the last customize the name of the selected input Custom input names can character space is passed include up to eight characters Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name To customize the name o
157. VD1 M Dvb2 PROG MENU RANDO ANGLE DISPL SETUP RETUR S ON CLEAR MEMO AUDIO S CHA REPEA TITLE TIME SLOW A B SHUFF SOUND SLOW K PAE1 0 PAGE2 SYSTEM OFF OFF POWER ON OFF VOL UP VOL DN CH UP SKIP CH DN SKIP MUTE PRE CH SEARCH UP UP DOWN DN LEFT LEFT RIGHT SELECT PLAY STOP REW FF MENU IK GUIDE O EXIT EJECT II INFO PAUSE 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 DISPLAY DISPLAY ENTER ENTER SAT M SAT VCR VCR FAUCH ACTIO FETCH HELP VIT INPUT PROG TSPE ALPHA REC A E DISP SLOW COUNT A TRK NEXT SERVI B F VCR P SLOW RESET A CH VIEW BACK G F ADV SLOW CLEAR ADD ALT HOP D H XPLA EJECT TREC DELET m 0 PAE2 page 0 PGE SYSTEM OFF OFF SYSTEM OFF OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF VOL UP VOL UP VOL UP VOL UP VOL DN VOL DN VOL DN VOL DN CH UP SKIP CH UP CH DN SKIP CH DN SKIP MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE PRE CH SEARCH PRE CH SEARCH UP UP UP UP DOWN DN DOWN DN LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT PLAY PLAY PLAY STOP STOP STOP REW REW REW FF FF FF MENU MENU MENU i GUIDE GUIDE GUIDE RECORD II INFO INFO Il INFO PAUSE 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY EN TER ENTER ENTER ENTER
158. VL 13dB BASS XOVER 156Hz SHAPE 0 SPREAD 0 SIZE 19m LIVE MED MID RT BASS RT ROLLOFF TREB CUT RT PRE DELAY ADVANCED CUSTOM LIVE MED ADVANCED REVERB LVL EARLY RFLX LVL BASS XOVER SHAPE SPREAD SIZE LIVE LARGE MID RT BASS RT ROLLOFF TREB CUT RT PRE DELAY ADVANCED CUSTOM 4dB 14dB 156 2 2 25 30m 4 71s 4 71s 3 1kHz 2 4kHz 20ms LIVE LARGE ADVANCED REVERB LVL EARLY RFLX LVL BASS XOVER SHAPE SPREAD SIZE 6dB 17dB 156Hz 2 28 38m B 14 RV 8 Appendix B Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below The CALIBRATION option is available for the PANORAMA listening mode The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is selected Listening mode menu parameter drop down menus are shown below and on the next page MONO LOGIC CUSTOM EFFECT LVL 9dB ACADMY FILTER ON SURR ROLLOFF 0 OUTPUT LEVELS 3 1kHz PANORAMA PANORAMA CALIBRATION EFFECT LVL NT SOURCE LEFT amp RIGHT BASS CONTENT STEREO SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg LOW FREQ WIDTH 0 LISTENER POS 0 SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms INPUT BALANCE lt l gt CALIBRATION OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM MONO LOGIC OUTPUT LEVELS EFFECT LVL 9dB CENTER ACADM Y FILTER ON SIDE UR SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz REAR L R OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM VS PRESET RESET
159. When set to ALWAYS ON the on screen display remains on at all times When set to 2 SECONDS the on screen display appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV 8 receives a command When set to ALWAYS OFF the on screen display remains off at all times It will not reappear until the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS Note When the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF the on screen display immediately disappears Use the front panel display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS 3 64 RV 8 Setup POSITION TOP CENTER BOTTOM gt gt Controls the vertical position of the two line status on the display device screen When set to the two line status appears near the top of the display device screen When set to CENTER the two line status is centered on the display device screen When set to BOTTOM the two line status appears near the bottom of the display device screen Refer to page 2 28 for more information about the two line status FORMAT SECAM PAL NTSC EZ ESS SESS gt Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors the video switcher and the display device Select the setting that is compatible with the source components and display device Note The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S Video output connectors It does not affect the component
160. X UL2 CIN EX DTS ES THX These listening mode names differ depending on the input source the speaker config uration and certain parameter settings For 5 1 systems with only side or rear speak ers but not both pressing the button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode The MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears in the on screen and front panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input Source that is present For ES source 6 3 Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS Each listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter All listening mode menus are shown in the Appendix Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6 39 L7 HLM DE EI This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2 channel stereo or matrix encoded film sources Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives seven channels from 2 channel input sources Logic 7 also derives full frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase the perceived width length and sense of envelopment of the listening space Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement compared to other decoders Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings AUTO AZIMUTH ON OFF VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB 6 0 43 0dB 0 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR FRONT NEUTRAL
161. Y DISPLAY ENTER ENTER D 7 lt 2 ST amp 2 5 1 ANLG option 3 61 2 0 ENCODING parameter 2 34 2CH BYPASS listening mode 6 34 2CH BYPASS STATUS menu 2 32 2 CH MODE menu 3 15 2 CH Parameter D 2 2 CH parameter 3 12 2CH STATUS menu 2 30 2 CH SURROUND listening mode 6 15 2 CHANNEL listening mode 6 15 5 6 26 5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter 6 4 6 5 6 16 6 17 6 26 6 29 6 30 6 39 5 ST amp 5 1 ANLG option 3 61 5 1 2 CHANNEL listening mode 6 23 5 1 ANALOG STATUS menu 2 33 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode 6 16 5 1 L7 MUSIC listening mode 6 17 5 1 L7 TV listening mode 6 17 5 1 MAIN amp ZONE2 2 0 parameter 3 62 5 1 MONO listening mode 6 24 5 1 MONO LOGIC listening mode 6 23 5 1 MONO SURR listening mode 6 24 5 1 PLIIx MOV listening mode 6 20 5 1 PLIIx MUS listening mode 6 21 5 1a 2 CHANNEL listening mode 6 33 5 1a BYPASS listening mode 6 33 5 1a BYPASS STATUS menu 2 31 5 1a L7 FILM listening mode 6 29 5 1a L7 MUSIC listening mode 6 30 5 1a MODE menu 3 16 5 1a parameter 3 12 5 1a STANDARD listening mode 6 32 5 1a THX listening mode 6 30 5 1a THX MUSIC listening mode 6 32 5 1a THX SurEX listening mode 6 30 5 1a THX UL2Cin listening mode 6 30 5 1 channel connectors 2 7 8 STEREO INPUTS option 3 60 A A V SYNC DELAY parameter 3 63 3 67 D 4 about the RV 8 1 2 AC input connector 2 9 ACADEM Y FILTER parameter 6 15 6 23 6 39 adjusting
162. ZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio OUTPUT LEVELS Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu which is used to adjust output levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center Subwoofer Side L R and Rear L R Refer to page 5 32 for more information Available in all except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes PANORAMA ON OFF When set to ON Dolby PUI MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel signals which creates a wraparound effect with side wall imaging Available in Dolby PUI MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes Note The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate PANORAMA listening mode page 6 13 PRE DELAY 1 to 100ms OFF Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of rever beration Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger Because some pre delay is inherent in all source material you should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting then make adjustments accordingly Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes RE EQUALIZER ON OFF Simulates high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters When set to ON the RV 8 applies a high frequency filter When set to OFF the RV 8 does not apply a high frequency filter I
163. a 2 channel source is present When the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST The RV 8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2 CHAN NEL listening mode and the previous listening mode and ignores the USE LAST setting Instead it uses the listening mode for example L7 FILM that was activated before the 2 CHANNEL listening mode The RV 8 activates a DTS NEO 6 listening mode if a DTS NEO 6 listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present and a 44 1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present Since the DTS NEO 6 listening modes are dynamic they cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu which is used to select a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources The RV 8 activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST The RV 8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present The RV 8 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV Movie listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present Since Dolby PLIIx M OV is a dynamic listening mode it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources Setup Lexicon S
164. able when both the side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a surround back channel from the other surround channels Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EX DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 Note The RV 8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding Input Source Parameter Setting 5 1 Channel Dolby Digital vepres renin EX DECODING AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX DECODING ON DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX EX DECODING OFF DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL 6 22 RV 8 Mode Adjust 5 1 2
165. ace It is recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate high frequency absorptive spaces Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes SHAPE 0TO 4 Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the sound of areal room SHAPE and SPREAD work together if either is set to zero the other has no effect Available in all LIVE modes SIDE L R 30 to 12dB OFF Controls the level of the Side L R audio output connectors in the Main Zone Available in all except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes SIZE 4 to 20 or 30m Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or 30m range depending on the listening mode Increase the size of the space to increase the reverb effect Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes CAUTION Setting the BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio SOUND STAGE FRONT NEUTRAL REAR Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output connectors When set to FRONT Side L R and Rear L R output levels are attenuated by 6dB shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the front of the listening space When set to NEUTRAL Side L R and Rear L R output levels are slightly attenuated by shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening space When set t
166. achieves a 75dB SPL Meter reading 5 After selecting the output level pressthe arrow button to close the horizontal bar graph 6 Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels you want 3 57 Lexicon Setup SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS gt EZ gt y gt The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu to set amplitude limits on low frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors including the Subwoofer The RV 8 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low frequency signals from exceeding a designated output level This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources that produce low frequency signal peaks at much higher output levels than 2 channel sources In home theaters there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting to reproduce low frequency signals MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST BASS PEAK LIMITER CAL NOISE AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES LEVELS CALIBRATION EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LIMITER I TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC BASS PEAK LIMITERS LIMIT ADJ 100dB AKON SETUP DISPLAYS MANUAL 11 VOLUME CONTROLS q ES CAUTION pag TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS DE ra TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING ce
167. all channels Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 MONO Tease gt This mode designed for playback of mono sources sends mono sources to the center channel and subwoofer Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1L7 ALM RETI The 5 1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded film sources and provides remarkable improvement compared to other decoders It derives seven channels from 5 1 channel input sources with enhanced front steering When both side and rear speakers are present the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 6 0dB 3 0dB 0 0dB RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKRENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM 500HZ to 20kHz OFF OFF 1ms to 30ms AUTO ON OFF 10 0dB to 0 0dB Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descripti
168. an be associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the same time When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and program operation parameters are set to ON the trigger output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corre sponding Main Zone inputs Main Zone listening modes or Zone 2 inputs The connector cannot be associated with individual Zone 2 inputs rather it can be associated with the Zone 2 inputs as a group When configured for program operation the connector is activated when the corresponding inputs and listening modes are selected and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and listening modes are deselected Note When the CUSTOM menu RESET M ODE option is selected to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV cD TUNER PHONO ZONE2 INPUTS ZONE3 INPUTS fi FILM TT TI ti MUSIC SURR KI PLIIx THX KI PLIIx MOV KI PLlix MUS KI PLII THX PLII MOVIE KI PLII MUSIC KI PL THX PRO LOGIC am THX tee MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND
169. anel or remote control Mode 4 and buttons DTS DTS ES amp DTS ES Discr Ez os EZE on This mode decodes 5 1 matrix or 6 1 discrete channels from DTS ES sources It is designed for playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES and 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES Sources The six decoded main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of 120Hz The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup Refer to page 6 25 for more information Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 28 RV 8 Mode Adjust DTS 2 CHAN amp DTS ES 2 CHAN gt on These modes recommended for recording purposes send downmixed 5 1 channel or 6 1 channel DTS ES input signals to the front speakers and subwoofer as 2 channel Logic 7 encoded output signals Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER MIX 0dB 25 to 5dB SURROUND MIX 0dB 5 to 45dB CNTR DLY SAMPLES 40 127 to 127 MASTER LEVEL 0dB 5 to 5dB LFE MIX 40 0dB 20 0 to 40 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON
170. at the micro phones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level Increase associated amplifier volume levels including if applicable powered subwoofer amplifiers The microphones may be positioned too far away more than 30 feet 9 14m from the selected speaker See the microphone placement examples on pages 3 41 to 3 45 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration 3 52 RV 8 Setup MANUAL CALIBRATION Ex gt REISS gt Ez Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu to manually calibrate speaker distances and output levels The table below indicates available manual calibration options MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SETUP INPUTS MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS sN SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT 0 098 0 008 0 098 ide o 0 008 M 0 048 0 0dB 0 048 0 0dB Manual Options Details SPEAKER DISTANCES Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances INTE
171. ated in Europe and now with limited availability in the US the RDS is a standard for broadcasting digital data along with an FM radio broadcast When the RDS option is active and RDS data is received the RV 8 tuner displays the identity of the broadcast station receipt of alternate station frequencies and any additional text referred to as RT or Radio Text that the station broadcasts For more information on RDS features see Tuner Setup on page 3 72 SELECTING A STATION Begin selecting a radio station by activating the built in tuner input To activate the tuner input press the front panel TUNER button or select the TUN ER option from the remote control MAIN screen See the Tuner Setup on page 3 72 for more information Next determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing the front panel or remote control AM FM button to toggle between the AM and FM frequency bands Oncethe frequency band is set there are several waysto select a radio station direct station access tune seek access scan mode and presets DIRECT STATION ACCESS To access a specific frequency use the numeric buttons on either the front panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control 1 Pressthe AM FM button to select the desired band 2 Enter the three or four digit station frequency For example to load FM station 90 9 press 9 0 9 To load AM station 103
172. ation considerations 1 5 INTERNAL NOISE TEST 3 53 3 56 IR IN connector 2 9 IR receiver 2 3 L L7 FILM listening mode 3 13 6 4 L7 MUSIC listening mode 6 5 L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode 6 5 L7 TV listening mode 6 4 LEDs IR receiver 2 3 LEGACY VIDEO parameter 3 21 level meters 3 10 LEVELS CALIBRATION menu 3 55 LEVELS CALIBRATIONS menu D 3 LEVELS option 3 36 3 48 LFE MIX parameter 6 16 6 17 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 42 LIMIT ADJ parameter 3 59 LIMITER parameter 3 58 3 59 LISTENER POS parameter 6 42 listening mode activating 6 2 descriptions 6 4 parameter descriptions 6 39 preferred 6 3 selection buttons 6 3 listening modes preferred 3 12 3 14 LIVE CALIBRATION menu 3 3 parameter 3 80 performing 3 83 LIVE listening mode 6 35 LIVE STATUS menu 2 33 LIVENESS parameter 6 11 6 42 loading presets 2 11 LOCK OPTIONS 3 79 AUDIO CNTRL parameter 3 79 menu 3 3 MODES parameter 3 79 SETUP parameter 3 79 LOUDNESS parameter 4 2 frequency response graph 4 5 LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter 6 13 6 42 low pass filter 3 28 3 28 M MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE3 2 0 parameter 3 62 MAIN 7 1 parameter 3 62 MAIN ADVANCED option 3 17 MAIN menu 2 15 MAIN PWR ON parameter 3 68 Main Zone Off button 2 5 Main Zone selection buttons 2 4 maintenance 7 4 manual analog audio adjustments 3 10 manual calibration 3 53 MANUAL parameter
173. bilities Optional 19 inch rack mount kit IR preprogrammed learning remote control with LCD display Maximum volume level RV 8 Getting Started PRODUCT REGISTRATION Please register the RV 8 Receiver within 15 days of purchase Register online at www lexicon com or complete and return the product registration card attached to the back cover of this user guide Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS The RV 8 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal performance Pay particular attention to instructions below and to other precautions that appear throughout this user guide Do install the RV 8 on a solid flat level surface such as a table or shelf The RV 8 can also be installed in a standard 19 inch equipment rack using an optional rack mount kit available from an authorized Lexicon dealer Do select a dry well ventilated location out of direct sunlight Do Nor expose the RV 8 to high temperatures humidity steam smoke dampness or excessive dust Avoid installing the RV 8 near radiators or stacking the RV 8 over other heat producing equipment such as a power amplifier Do Nor install the RV 8 near unshielded TV or FM antennas cable TV decoders or other RF emitting devices that might cause interference Do Nor place the RV 8 on a thick rug or carpet or cover the RV 8 with a cloth as this might prevent proper cooling Do NOT place the RV 8 on a wi
174. by Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged THX or THX ULTRA2 listening modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged Refer to the 5 1 THX ULTRA2 5 1 THX SurEX and 5 1 THX listening mode descriptions that begin on page 6 18 or the DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS ES THX listening mode descriptions that begin on page 6 27 for more information Note the following Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low level clicks in the front speakers THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the audio output connectors labeled Front L R It is recommended that you set this parameter to 2dB or 43dB for all input sources Available in 5 1 2 CHANNEL and DTS ES 2 CHAN modes TREB CUT RT 500Hz to 20kHz Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in the reverberated signal causing reverberated signals to grow progressively darker This results in a more natural sound because it simulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall Setting this parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re circulates and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time Available in all LIVE modes VOCAL ENHANCE 6 0dB 3 0dB 0 0dB Controls the level of dialog boost in the audio output connector labeled Center Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility particularly a
175. c sources Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 40 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON BASS ENHANCE OFF Default Setting Possible Settings 43 0dB 40 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM FRONT NEUTRAL REAR ON OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7 0kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1 to 30ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions L7 MUSIC SURR EIT This listening mode is designed for playback of 2 channel stereo music sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of recordings that contain added reverb It is recommended for classical music sources which are often recorded in real spaces with added reverb to enhance the stereo mix Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon products Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source and sends these sounds to all speakers Ambient sounds are heard from all directions creating a realistic playback presentation that simulates what listeners experience in real spaces Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 40 0dB FRONT STEERING MSURR Default Setting Possible Settings 6 0dB 3 0dB 0 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT NEUTRAL REAR 5 SPKRENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF
176. ce 100ko in parallel with 150pF Digital Audio Inputs Four S PDIF coaxial RCA and four S PDIF optical connectors Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC 958 S PDIF standards Accepts 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz sample rates Accepts 16 24 bit PCM audio Dolby Digital DTS DTS ES discrete and DTS 96K data formats Preamp Output Level 150mV Rms typical 6V Rms maximum RCA connectors Maximum value with full scale input signal and volume at 12dB Preamp Output Impedance 5000 in parallel with 150pF RCA connectors Main Zone Audio Outputs Eight unbalanced RCA connectors for Front L R Center Sub Side L R and Rear L R Zone 2 and Zone 3 Audio Performance A D Conversion 24 Bit 44 1 to 96kHz multibit AX architecture Zone 2 only Zone 2 Audio Outputs Oneunbalanced RCA variable output level stereo con nector Oneunbalanced RCA fixed output level stereo connector One S PDIF coaxial RCA connector and one optical con nector D A Converson 24 Bit 44 1 to 192kHz multibit Ax architecture Zone 3 Audio Outputs One stereo RCA variable output level connector Frequency Response 10Hz to 20kHz 0 1dB 0 25dB 0 75dB at 40kHz reference 1kHz THD Noise Below 0 005 at 1kHz 1V Rms output level Dynamic Range 101dB minimum 22kHz bandwidth Headphone Amplifier One stereo 1 4 inch phone connector Seven channels tw
177. ces Measure the distance between the primary listening posi tion and the front baffle of each speaker Then set the cor responding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the closest available value Sit in the primary listening position If the primary listening position is not centered between the front left and right speakers as shown in illustration B above set the PANORAMA CALIBRATION LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for the difference using the remote control a arrow Center RIGHT buttons Each increment within the 127 to 127 parameter range represents about one third of an inch The Left illus tration shows the left of center position The Right illustration shows the right of center position Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT Begin playback of the external calibration source When playback of the external calibration source is in progress set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in the right ear To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter settings set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT amp RIGHT If the PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated the sound should be perceived to come from all around the primary listening position If not go back to Step 1 and repeat the calibration procedure 6 14 RV 8 Mode Adjust 2 CH SURROUND gt This mode designed for playback of stereo sources sends the left channel to Front Side and R
178. cleaners or strong commercial cleaners Do not use a cloth made with steel wool or metal polish If the RV 8 is exposed to a dusty environment a RESTORING FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS When factory default settings are restored all parameters and user defined values are restored to their factory default settings Before restoring factory default settings record all user defined settings in the Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D 2 FACTORY SETTINGS RESTORE DEFAULTS gt HAVE BEEN RESTORED PRESS ANY KEY TO RESTART To restore factory default settings 1 Record all user defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on page D 2 When factory default settings are restored all parameters and user defined values are restored to their factory default settings 2 Ifthe RV 8 is powered on press the front panel standby button or the remote control Off button to activate standby mode and deactivate the RV 8 If the RV 8 is in standby mode proceed to step 3 low pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its exterior surface Replace the remote control batteries as needed The remote control requires four AAA batteries When these batteries are low on power the remote control enters a low voltage condition that prevents it from operating the RV 8 Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed Press the front panel standby button or the remote control
179. cting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers select NONE to redirect rear channel signals to the Side L R output connectors If the SIDE L R parameter is also set to NONE the RV 8 redirects surround channel signals to the Front L R output connectors Note When the REAR L R parameter is set to NONE Dolby Digital Surround EX THX Ultra2 THX Surround EX PLIIx modes DTS ES decoding and the ASA parameter are not available EY gt BEE v EEE When THX speaker setup is selected the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu opens which is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L R output connectors To activate and configure the Rear L R output connectors for a 7 1 channel THX speaker setup select THX 80Hz To deactivate the Rear L R output connectors and configure the M ain Zone audio output connectors for a 5 1 channel THX speaker setup select NONE 3 32 RV 8 Setup MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC SETUP DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SUBWOOFER EGY EZ gt EEE gt Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer When set to FULL the RV 8 sends a full range audio output signal to
180. ctors to the Main Zone audio output connectors based on the input source that is present For example When a 2 channel PCM Dolby Digital or DTS ES source is present the RV 8 automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector When an SACD source is present the RV 8 automatically selects the assigned analog audio input connector Note the following The RV 8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT parameter to AUTO when both digital and analog audio input connectors are assigned When no compatible digital source is present the RV 8 automatically selects the assigned analog audio input connector The AUTO setting is recommended for components that generate both digital and analog input signals such as DVD SACD players Setup Lexicon CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS continued S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON OFF COMPONENT OSD ON OFF Eam gt EE B gt DEZ ELSE Controls the appearance of the on screen display when the display device is connected to an S Video output connector When set to ON the display device shows the on screen display in a 4 3 aspect ratio regardless of the incoming signal Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of the picture on the display device or to the ratio between the height and width of the display device A 4 3 aspect ratio is almost square A 16 9 aspect ratio often referred to as widescreen is almost twice as wide as it is high Wh
181. d a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or a 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is detected DTS ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and a 5 1 channel DTS source is detected e DTS ES Discr mode decodes 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in the MODE ADJUST menu The mode appears in the Setup menu when a DTS 6 1 source is present and seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu Note The table below is not applicable to the DTS ES THX DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes These listening modes will be explained in greater detail later in this manual Input Source 5 1 Channel 6 1 Channel Parameter setting Channels Matrix Encoded DTS ES Discrete Encoded DTS ES ES DECODING AUTO DTS DTS ES DTS ES ES DECODING ON DTS ES DTS ES DTS ES ES DECODING OFF DTS DTS DTS 6 25 Adjust Lexicon DTS ES L7 FILM amp DTS L7 FILM 2770 These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to decode seven channels from 5 1 and 6 1 channel film sources with enhanced front steering When both side and rear speakers are present the DTS ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5 1 channel
182. d be done if a TV is replaced with a new TV The code table for Laserdisc is stored under DVD2 The codetable for cable box is stored under Zone 2 The code table for cassette player is stored under Zone 3 AUTO SCAN WITH THREE DIGIT NUMBER You can also program the remote control by sending out a series of Power Off commands for different brands stored in the library by using the following steps This is similar to the first method except it is easier to move through all of the device codesfor your device and make note of each one that turns your device OFF To program the remote to make it compatible with other components 1 2 Manually turn on the device you plan to operate Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the P PRO button next to the LCD screen The remote will be flashing SELECT BUTTON Press the device you wish to program For example to program TV pressthe TV button The remote will be flashing FROM TABLE Select the device from which the scanned code will be selected Important If you have already relabeled your device keys the LCD screen will not look like the illustration on page C 5 Select the appropriate LCD button for the FROM TABLE using the labels as shown in the illustration on page C 4 For example if you have relabeled PHONO as LIGHTS you would still push the bottom right button to access the AUX Code Table Point the remot
183. der or a similar component Complementing its audio performance the RV 8 features broadcast quality video switchers An ultrawide bandwidth component video switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals while a composite and S Video switcher accepts high quality NTSC PAL or SECAM video signals Composite and S Video sources can be converted to 480i NTSC 576i PAL component video The component video switcher can pass high definition TV HDTV signals and standard definition SD TV signals Both switchers are designed to pass video signals without alteration or degradation Built to professional standards the RV 8 is designed to serve as the control center in any high quality home theater Even the most demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combination of power performance flexibility and technological sophistication With extensive expansion capabilities the RV 8 represents a solid investment that will retain its value in the face of rapidly emerging technologies Getting Started Lexicon HIGHLIGHTS Eight channels Eight configurable inputs Three independent zones Integrated 7 channel amplifier with thermal and DC protection and toroidal power transformer Compatible with 2Q speaker impedances AM FM stereo radio tuner RDS Phono input with 2 channel analog bypass path Up to two 5 1 channel analog audio input connectors Analog bypass option for 5 1 anal
184. dio output in Zone 2 One S PDIF coaxial and one S PDIF optical Toslink connector is available 18 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL Reserved for future developments 19 AC INPUT CONNECTOR Provides power to the RV 8 through the supplied power cord 20 POWER SWITCH Use the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the AC Input connector to the RV 8 The I and positions represent on and off status respectively When the RV 8 is powered on the front panel Standby button or remote control On button can be used to activate and deactivate standby mode When the RV 8 is powered off standby mode is not available In the event of a power outage the RV 8 will display a BROWNOUT CYCLE POWER message To turn the unit back on use the rear panel power switch In this instance the front panel StandBy switch has no effect 2 9 Basic Operation Lexicon TUNER OVERVIEW The RV 8 features an AM FM stereo radio tuner The front panel displays the currently selected frequency band listening mode and volume Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies identified by the preset number name and station frequency band For example WABC 90 90 FM or Preset 02 10 30 AM Two antennas are supplied with the RV 8 one for AM and one for FM stereo At a minimum use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensure consistent tuner performance The tuner can be setup to receive elements of the Radio Data System RDS broadcasts Origin
185. down menu When a menu is open press the Menu and arrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete list of menu items The highlighted menu item appears in the front panel display All menu items appear in the on screen display A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on screen display when menu items exceed the on screen display s top and bottom margins The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed 2 15 Basic Operation Lexicon MENU OPTIONS Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu structure For example selecting SETUP from the MAIN M ENU opens the SETUP menu SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT PARAMETER DROP DOWN MENUS Selecting some menu options opens a drop down menu that contains a list of available parameter settings For example selecting the CUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens a drop down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting DISPLAY SETUP ON ON SCREEN DISPLAY OFF FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AIV SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME To select a setting in a parameter drop down menu 1 When the drop down menu opens press the remote control 4 and arrows to scroll upwa
186. e Zone 2 Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels MAIN MENU SETUP VOLUME CONTROL SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS MAIN PWR ON 30dB AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT Z2 PWR ON EU Z2 PWR ON EUM 4 HEADPHONE 30dB 1 MAX VOLUME 12dB Parameter Possible Settings MAIN PWRON 30dB LAST LVL 80 to 12dB MUTE LEVEL 30dB 40dB 30dB 20dB 10dB FULL Z2 PWRON 30dB LAST LVL 80 to 12dB Z3 PWRON 30dB LAST LVL 80 to 12dB HEADPHONE 30dB MAX VOLUME 12dB LAST LVL 80 to 12dB 80 to 12dB MAIN PWR ON gt Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the Main Zone is activated When set to LAST LVL the Main Zone activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous operating session LAST LVL 80 to 12dB VOLUME CONTROL SETUP 10dB MUTE LEVEL ES r gt LAST LVL 80 to 12dB MAIN PWR ON 30dB 20dB MUTE LEVEL 30dB 30dB Z2 PWR ON 300B 40dB 72 PWR ON 30dB FULL MUTE HEADPHONE 30dB MAX VOLUME 412dB MUTE LEVEL 40aB 30dB 20dB 10dB FULL MUTE gt gt Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the front panel or remote control Mute button is pressed When set to FULL MUTE Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated
187. e CD Selectsthe CD Selects the L7 Selects the CD Toggles the Setup command bank which input for the Music Surround input for Zone 2 ON SCREEN includes commands Main Zone listening mode DISPLAY parameter that control the CD player 12 Selects the Phono Selects the Toggles between SelectsthePhono Deactivatesthe RV 8 command bank which Phono input for setting the input input for Zone 2 includes commands the Main Zone to auto analog or that control the digital associated device 13 N A Selects Page 2 of Selects Page lof Selects Page 2 of Selects Page 1 of the the Main Zone the Main Zone the Zone 2 Zone 2 command command bank command bank command bank bank 14 Selects the Home command bank 15 Y o Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages 2 16 History dependent Increasesthe M ain Zone volume level in 1dB increments Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB increments History dependent buttons perform different functions depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device 2 20 RV 8 Basic Operation w 9 Selects the VCR input Increases the AUDIO Closes certain Setup Activates and deacti for Zone 3 CONTROLS menu BASS
188. e Combination of the VCR and display device Note Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce a satisfactory picture with either setting In such cases better results may be achieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S video FORMAT DETECT NORMAL FAST Ex gt id gt ETII Controls how the RV 8 reacts when it detects silence in the digital audio stream Digital sources typically output a short period of silence when switching between sources When set to NORMAL the RV 8 will not mute when silence is detected This setting is appropriate for most sources When set to FAST the RV 8 will mute when approximately 2ms of continuous digital silence is detected Once valid audio is received the RV 8 will configure its processing and deactivate mute This prevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signal changes For example when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital format changes ZONE2 IN ES gt E gt EE Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs The INPUT SETUP menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog input connector for the selected input See page 3 7 for more information The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings DIGITAL ANLG DMIX Note When using DTS encoded discs set the ZON E2 IN parameter t
189. e HOME PAGE and FAV buttons cannot be programmed It is not recommended that you re program the Main Zone 2 or Zone 3 buttons 7 Pressthe button on the original remote control that you wish to program onto the RV 8 remote Once the RV 8 remote has received the signal the RV 8 remote will flash GOOD on the LCD screen indicating it learned the code correctly Perform Step 6 within 20 seconds of step 5 otherwise the remote will revert to the SETUP menu and then after a period of time it will go back to the MAIN device page If it flashes Fail repeat from step 4 until it leams successfully 8 Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the buttons that are required 9 Once you complete the programming and wish to exit the LEARNING mode press the HOME button Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again If you are having problems learning to the Volume Channel and Transport buttons it may be because you have previously assigned a Punch Through from another device to that device To remove a Punch Through just punch through the device to itself For example to erase a punch through from a TV to a SAT device just punch through the TV to the TV See Programming Punch Through Functions on page 12 for more information PROGRAMMING THE TEN DEVICE BUTTONS This procedure will program ONE learned code onto the Device button so that when that Device is selected it will send out the learned s
190. e control toward the component and press either the UP or DOWN button on the LCD It will send out a series of Power Off codes when the button is kept pressed and the code numbers that are being sent are shown on the LCD If the right code number is sent the component will tum off right after the code number is transmitted Release the UP or DOWN button as soon as the device is turned off If you passed the one that tumed off the device manually tum the device back on and reverse your UP or DOWN one press at a time until the unit turns off There is no way of knowing which C 6 RV 8 Appendix C code is the one that will have the functions that more closely match the device than the others so it is advised to try them all See Step 9 below Press the UP or DOWN button within 20 seconds of beginning programming otherwise the remote will revert to the SETUP menu and then after a period of time it will go back to the MAIN device page If there is more than one code number assigned to your brand try one code number at a time until the correct code number is found the number that tums off the device If the device tums off when you enter the three digit code make note of the code It will have at least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the device 8 Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button After ensuring that the right code is entered save the code by pressing the SAVE button on
191. e from the Mode scroll list replaces the preferred selection However this newly selected mode will be lost when switching between inputs The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV 8 software to remember the last used listening mode for a given input source Once selected that mode will always be active on the corresponding input until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in the following example Select Main Menu gt SETUP gt INPUTS gt DVD1 gt ET Iss USE LAST Press the MENU button Press the DVD 1 button Play a DTS input source Press the MODE button until you reach DTS ES 2 CHAN Press the TV button The RV 8 switches to the TV input and the on screen display identifies the preferred listening mode 7 Press the DVD 1 button The on screen display should identify that the active listening mode for the DVD1 input is still DTS ES 2 CHAN As the DTS ES 2 CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode it can also be set in the SETUP menu N When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu and the appropriate source material is played the dynamic listening mode or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu can always be accessed using the MODE or MODE buttons whether or not a preferred mode is set When a preferred listening mode is set and a dynamic listening mode or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu is active the selected dynamic m
192. ear Left channels and the right channel to Front Side and Rear Right channels and sums the Left and Right for the center It is recommended for background music Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 2 CHANNEL MODE 2 CHANNEL This mode designed for playback of stereo sources sends the left and right channels to the Front L R and Subwoofer channels It is recom mended for two speaker playback with subwoofers and for comparison purposes with other listening modes Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings SUB LEVEL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions MONO LOGIC This mode designed for playback of mono sources uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels This dramatically increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the listening space Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EFFECT LVL 9dB 12 to 46dB ACADEM Y FILTER ON ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Adjust Lexicon MONO SURROUND 4 This mode designed for playback of mono sources sends the mono source to
193. ed after all presets have been entered but it is desired to rescan in order to obtain new presets For example if you have moved to a new city it would be necessary to clear all existing presets and scan for local stations MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT gt LOGS gt bna This selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNER PRESETS menu For more information see Tuner Presets on page 5 2 TUNER SETUP REGION SCAN SENS AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT ON SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTO FREQUENCY ON 3 75 Setup Lexicon TUNER SETUP continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT DISPLAY RDS NAME PRESET NAME FREQUENCY EZ v Tuner serur v Identifies the current channel setting in the top right corner of the OSD and front panel display There are three possible selections RDS NAME PRESET NAME and FREQUENCY The default setting is RDS NAME PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of the currently selected channel If the current channel is not a tuner preset then the channel frequency will
194. efault Setting Possible Setting ON SCREEN DISPLAY Refer to page 3 64 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Refer to page 3 66 A V SYNC DELAY OFF OFF 1 to 60ms CUSTOM NAME OFF ON OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME N A N A DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY A V SYNC DELAY CUSTOM NAME EDIT CUSTOM NAME OFF OFF OFF 1 to 60ms 3 63 Setup Lexicon ON SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP Eat gt EES gt Opens the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu which is used to customize the on screen display MAIN MENU SETUP DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY ALWAYS ON MODE ADJUST INPUTS ON SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS gt 2 SECONDS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS FRONT PANEL DISPLAY POSITION ALWAYS OFF TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AIV SYNC DELAY FORMAT SETUP DISPLAYS CUSTOM NAME BACKGROUND MH TOP VOLUME CONTROLS EDIT CUSTOM NAME pos CENTER TRIGGER I BOTTOM TUNER SETUP I 10 OPTIONS SECAM LIVE CALIBRATION ON PAL POWER MANAGEMENT OFF iiis NTSC TAT A Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings 5 05 ANATS ON 2 SECONDS ALWAYS OFF Sati gt DENA b Kos EIEN gt STATUS 2 SECONDS ALWAYS ON 2 SECONDS Ea gt EPI STATUS ALWAYS OFF POSITION TOP TOP CENTER BOTTOM FORMAT NTSC SECAM PAL NTSC BACKGROUND ON ON OFF Activates and deactivates the on screen display sent to the Main Zone video output connector
195. egin on the next page to position the microphones for automatic calibration Select the microphone placement that best meets the needs of the listening space 3 42 RV 8 Setup PRO PER microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position When calibrating for a single listening position place the microphones V As close together as possible a single listening position the primary listening position At the approximate spot where the listener s head will be during listening X In a clear line of sight path with the speakers V alocation unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals V At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for a single listening position The microphones are v positioned as close together as possible in a single listening position allowing the RV 8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that position Microphone Subwoofer 3 43 Setup Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued PRO PER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row When calibrating for multiple listening positions in a single row position the
196. elect menu items CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS and SETUP AUDIO CONTROLS ww To select a menu item on the open menu MENU NAVIGATION 1 Press the remote control and arrows to highlight the desired Use the remote control arrow buttons to navigate the extensive menu structure starting on page B 2 The table below indicates the navigation commands that the remote control buttons perform when the Main Zone command bank is activated Note menu item 2 When the desired menu item is highlighted press the Menu gt arrow to select the highlighted item If an option is selected another menu opens If a parameter is selected a parameter drop down menu or horizontal graph opens The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT 10 and RT 20 disc players Arrow Navigation Functions When a menu is open press the remote control Menu arrow to select the highlighted menu item When no menus are open press the Menu arrow to open the MAIN MENU When a menu is open press the Menu arrow to close the menu and in most cases open the previous menu Subse quent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed When the MAIN MENU is closed the menu structure is also closed When no menus are open pressing the Menu arrow button performs no function When a drop down menu is open pressthe Menu arrow to select the current setting and close the drop
197. elected a downmix to Zone 2 is not available TWO LINE STATUS The two line status opens in the on screen and front panel displays whenever the RV 8 detects a change in input source or listening mode The Main Zone two line status appears when the RV 8 detects a Main Zone change and the Zone 2 or Zone 3 two line status appears when a Zone 2 or Zone 3 status change is detected The ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is used to control the length of time the two line status appears in the on screen display The ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION parameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two line status in the display device screen Note When the display device is connected to a component video output connector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set to OFF the on screen display does not appear on the associated display MAIN ZONE TWO LINE STATUS Opens in the on screen and front panel jw displays whenever the RV 8 detects a Main 34dB Zone status change The Main Zone two line status indicates the current input input source listening mode and volume level selected in the Main Zone ZONE 2 TWO LINE STATUS Opens in the on screen and front panel displays whenever the RV 8 detects a Zone 2 status 137 34dB change The Zone 2 two line status indicates the current input input source and volume level selected in Zone 2 2 28 RV 8 Basic Operation ZONE 3 TWO
198. els can be duplicated To do this select the FULL SUB crossover setting for the front center side or rear speakers Making this selection can result in excessive bass RV 8 Setup In general low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points Low frequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer If the lowest crossover point is FULL low frequency signals excluding LFE information will not be redirected to the subwoofer High Pass Filter map E Hi THIS E LL ASASA VA p d PLU PV PAA I ET LJ LV SAS TT ll l IU LATTE L l1 s 8 8 8 8 High pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting From left to right the curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz The graph above does not show the THX 80Hz crossover point which is 12dB per octave Low Pass Filter NR ch INN K 5 OU Low pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting From left to right the curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz 3 27 Setup Lexicon THX SPEAKER SETUPS Selecting THX SETUP o
199. en follow the instruc tions on page 7 4 to restore factory default settings 2 Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer 3 Contact Lexicon customer service at 781 280 0300 or www lexicon com Note Visit the knowledgebase at http www lexicon com kbase for answers to frequently asked questions and additional trouble shooting information The tuner volume suddenly went mute then after a minute it resumed This seems to happen occasionally Under the TUNER SETUP menu is the AUTO FREQUENCY option active You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts When the broadcast signal drops out the volume is muted and AUTO FREQUENCY activates scanning for alternate broadcast frequencies and then verifying that the station ID is an exact match If the station ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off the volume mute Otherwise auto frequency scans for another alternate frequency and repeats the procedure If there are a lot of alternate broadcast frequencies this process can take a noticeable amount of time To stop this behavior simply turn off the Auto frequency option Troubleshooting and M aintenance Lexicon ROUTINE MAINTENANCE The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should be performed on a periodic basis Clean the RV 8 exterior surface with a soft lint free cloth Do not use alcohol benzene acetone based
200. en OFF the display device shows the on screen display in the same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal Note The on screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display device screen when all of the following conditions are present S VIDEO OSD 4 3 parameter is OFF anamorphic video input signal is present A 16 9 display device widescreen is connected to an S Video output connector Sa y ENG b ESSE b Eee Controls the appearance of the on screen display when the display device is connected to the component video output connector When ON the display device shows the on screen display as a 480i video signal on a full blue screen background To minimize viewing distractions the two line status does not appear in the on screen display When OFF the display device does not show the on screen display including the two line status Note When the ON SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF the display device using the component video output connector will not show the on screen display 3 20 RV 8 Setup LEGACY VIDEO A B Ey gt When video played back from a VCR is converted to component video by the RV 8 the resulting picture quality depends on both the quality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the component display device The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections A and B Usethe one that gives the best picture for th
201. ening mode restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default settings To restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode 1 Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE option The PRESS RIGHT gt TO RESTORE MODE message appears in the on screen display CUSTOM P PRESS RIGHT CIALIUNTRISITINESS TO RESTORE MODE CUSTOM VS PRESET RESET MODE 2 Pressthe arrow button to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode Press arrow button to close the message without restoring the factory default Note When the CUSTOM menu RESET M ODE option is selected to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode the corre sponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF 6 38 RV 8 Mode Adjust LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON OFF Simulates 7 channel playback in 5 channel speaker configurations When set to ON the RV 8 provides an increased sense of spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers This enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are positioned to the side of the primary listening position or when the primary listening position is located against the rear wall The effec tiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space For best results it is recommended that you position the surround
202. ents DC and frequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers Dedicated channel status LEDs are located on the front panel to provide at a glance viewing of channel status at all times If the main power transformer temperature exceeds 100 C the transformer will deactivate all channel status LEDs will no longer be lit and the red standby LED will flash rapidly Once the transformer has cooled it automatically resets and the amplifier operates normally the channel status LEDs turn back on and the red standby LED is no longer lit The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of perfor mance and sound quality In addition THX Ultra2 certification ensures that the amplifiers meet the highest standards set forth by Lucasfilm s Home THX division AMPLIFIER CHANNEL STATUS Each channel has a blue Channel Status LED on the front panel that is illuminated when the unit is powered on If there is a problem with an amplifier channel the LED will turn off MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER OUTPUT The amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors When using bare speaker wires loosen the connector insert the wire into the top of the receptacle then tighten the connector The same procedure should be used for spade connectors Banana plugs should be inserted into the outward facing receptacle Use heavy gauge speaker cable to ensure low impedance connec tions
203. es that the internal noise test generates loud calibration noise signals When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens Pressthe arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on the previous page When the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu opens the internal noise test automatically begins Press the lt button to skip the internal noise test During the internal noise test the RV 8 sends calibration noise signals to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu The cursor automatically scrolls through output level param eters highlighting each parameter as the RV 8 sends the calibration noise signal to the corresponding speaker The calibration noise signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds Note When the internal noise test begins the RV 8 automatically sets volume level to 0dB Avoid adjusting the master volume level while the test is in progress to achieve THX reference levels 75dB To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test 1 Set the SPL meter to C weighting and SLOW response 2 Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position 3 Press the arrow button to highlight the desired output level parameter Then quickly press the button to select this output level parameter The horizontal bar graph shown on the previous page will open in the on screen display and automatic scrolling will stop Note During the internal noise test
204. eset Once all available stations have been scanned or if any TUNER button is pressed including the remote s buttons AUTOLOAD will stop To autoload stations from the other frequency band select that band and restart AUTOLOAD TUNER SETUP PRESS RIGHT gt REGION TO START AUTOLOAD SCAN SENS AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT ON SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTO FREQUENCY ON Note Presets are saved when the unit is powered down Because the AUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets consider using the CLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD Note that some channels may be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more than once since the last CLEAR ALL 3 74 RV 8 Setup MAIN MENU SETUP TUNER SETUP b PRESS RIGHT gt MODE ADJUST INPUTS REGION TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS SCAN SENS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOLOAD SETUP DISPLAYS CLEAR ALL VOLUME CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS TRIGGER DISPLAY RDS NAME TUNER SETUP RADIO TEXT ON LOCK OPTIONS SCROLL RATE MEDIUM LIVE CALIBRATION AUTO FREQUENCY ON POWER MANAGEMENT CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS Est TEES Clears all of the presets When this option is highlighted press the right gt arrow to select The message PRESS RIGHT TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS will appear in the on screen and front panel displays Press the left 4 arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command This should be us
205. ettings VOCAL ENHANCE 40 0dB 46 0dB 43 0dB 0 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz OFF REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF 1to 30ms LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 26 RV 8 Mode Adjust DTS ES THX amp DTS THX UL2Cin on The DTS THX UL2Cin ULTRA2 CINEMA and DTS ES THX listening modes allow 7 channel playback of 5 1 channel DTS sources that lack DTS ES encoding They are designed for playback of 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES or 6 1 channel DTS ES discrete encoded film sources DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS ES THX are recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers These modes apply THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present i
206. f the selected input 5 When the desired input name has been entered pressthe arrow button to close the menu and retum to the INPUT NAME menu 1 Follow the EDIT INPUT NAM E menu path to open the EDIT INPUT NAME drop down menu The custom input name appears in the on screen and front panel 2 When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens the current input displays Both the custom and factory default input names appear in name appears on the second line Using the remote control 4 the INPUT SETUP menu The custom input name appears against the and arrow buttons change the character above the cursor left margin of the on screen display and the factory default input name appears in parentheses against the right margin 3 When the desired character has been changed pressthe arrow button to advance to the next character space The cursor will Setup Lexicon MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV cD TUNER PHONO DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG IN ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 2 CH 51 FILM 00D 5 1 5 FILM a ities SjFILM 5 1 5 1a Gi FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED P DVD1 INPUT NAME EDIT INPUT NAME
207. five channels when only side or rear speakers are present In addition to THX processing THX re equalization is applied to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and may sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization This listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode To select this listening mode use the remote control or front panel Mode button When the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automatically activate a DTS Neo 6 THX listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions DTS NEO 6 CIN amp DTS NEO 6 MUSIC These modes are designed for playback of matrix encoded digital stereo film or music sources DTS Neo 6 derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are present rear channels will be in parallel It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are present These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot be assigned as preferred listening modes To select either of these listening modes use the remote control or front panel Mode button When the 2 CH para
208. g mode INPUT TYPE ANLG SAM PLE RATE 96kHz See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information 5 1 ANALOG STATUS INPUT MODE INPUT TYPE ANLG SAMPLE RATE 96kHz Parameter Possible Settings INPUT The current input MODE The current listening mode IN PUT TYPE MIC SAM PLE RATE 48kHz See STATUS M enu Parameter Descriptions on page 2 34 for detailed information 2CH STATUS INPUT DVD1 MODE LIVE MED INPUT TYPE MIC SAMPLE RATE 48kHz IL R 2 33 Basic Operation Lexicon STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 2 0 ENCODING Indicates whether or not a matrix encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is MATRIX a matrix encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is NONE a matrix encoded source is not detected The RV 8 cannot automatically detect matrix encoding in non flagged input sources MATRIX NONE BIT RATE 32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509 7kbps Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded A higher bit rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding process Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to 640 kbps Possible settings for DTS ES sources range from 754 to 1509 7 kbps CENTER MIX LVL Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used during the mixing process 3 0dB 4 5dB 6 0dB CHANNELS 3 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 0 Indicates the number of chan
209. guitar voices etc is not critical LIVE compensates for sounds that are closer to one microphone or another CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES CAUTION The Lexicon microphones require careful handling Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones can cause irreparable damage to the microphone microphone wires also require careful handling Do not sharply bend the wires or place objects on them Make sure the RV 8 is powered off or in standby mode Connect the Lexicon microphones to the microphone input 1 and 2 connectors on the RV 8 rear panel Connector 1 is for the left microphone connector 2 is for the right Make sure each microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection During the microphone check the microphones will be referred to as 1 and 2 based on the input connector to which the microphone is connected You should label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes 3 Power on the RV8 or deactivate standby mode 3 80 RV 8 Setup POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR LIVE Refer to the microphone placement examples below to position the microphones for LIVE PRO PER microphone positioning for LIVE Position the microphones On near opposite side walls X Approximately halfway between the front and Side speakers X At approximate height between the waist and head of a standing person V alocation unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures
210. hat when a particular type of input source is played the pre selected listening mode is activated The RV 8 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone input one listening mode each for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES 5 1a and MIC LIVE sources The table to the right indicates the IN PUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to select preferred listening modes Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DVD2 TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT DVD1 CD ODE DVD1 5 1 MODE Ems 7 FILM 5 1a WIFILM Cities 191 MUSIC 5 1a WI MUSIC FIT 5 1 5 1a STANDARD Cities 2 CHAN 5 1a 2 CHANNEL HEADPHONE HEADPHONE 5 1 USE LAST USE LAST Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters 2 CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2 channel sources DID Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources Ems Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS ES sources 5 la Selects a preferred listening mode for 5 1 analog sources MIC Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources LIVE b DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOGIN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 2 CH DOD ite 5 1a 5 1a Ii FILM MIC LIVE
211. he TV If the TV device button is pushed it will changethe input on the RV 8 to TV and you will not be able to adjust the picture for the DVD In this case it would be better to not program a code to the TV device PROGRAM MING FAVORITE CHANNELS Up to 50Favorite Channel buttons can be programmed and saved Each favorite channel button can send up to 10 commands with one button press To program Favorite Channel Buttons 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the FAV button next to the LCD screen Press the device button that corresponds to the component that the FAV channel will control For example pressing the TV device will only send the type of code to which that the TV responds to Pressing the SAT device will only control the satellite box 4 Pressthe LCD button you will be assigning to the favorite channel and enter the channel number you wish to store in the FAV channel button Up to 10 digits can be stored 5 Pressthe favorite channel button selected in step 4 again to store the programmed channel Note If a wrong channel number is pushed move the cursor by using the left or right button of the joystick and then reassign the correct channel number 6 Repeat from Step 3 until all the desired FAV channel buttons have been programmed 7 Once programming is completed press the HOME button to exit from the Favorite Channel mode Exit from the SE
212. he amount of manual input level adjustment In other words the AUTO GAIN parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter When the AUTO parameter is ON the AUTO GAIN parameter continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment until automatic adjustments have been made LEVEL M ETERS EJ gt id gt EI Indicate fluctuating input levels for the selected input Like the STATUS menu level meters ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate input levels for both analog and digital audio sources However ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments affect only analog audio sources Level meters appear in combinations of green yellow and red when the on screen display is configured for a blue screen background Green indicates low levels yellow indicates normal levels and red indicates the onset of overload Level meters appear in white when the on screen display is not configured for a blue screen background 3 10 RV 8 Setup VIDEO IN COM POSITE 1 TO 5 SVIDEO 1 TO 5 NONE gt EI Opens the VIDEO IN menu which is used to assign a composite or S Video input connector for the selected input The RV 8 has eight configurable inputs each of which can be assigned to any of its five composite or five S Video input connectors Note Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or S Video source is present S Video output connectors are available when an S V
213. hen the front side and rear speakers are present Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode The DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded film sources To activate the DOLBY PLIIx Mov listening mode play the 2 channel source input and select the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front panel or remote control Mode buttons When the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automat ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx M OV listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded film source was present Note The M OV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Adjust Lexicon DOLBY PLIIx MUS amp DOLBY PLII MUSIC gt on Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6 1 or 7 1 channel six or seven speakers and a subwoofer surround sound from any native two channel stereo or 5 1 channel source The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front side and rear Speakers are prese
214. hich Conformity is Declared EN 55013 2001 EN 55020 2002 EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000 3 3 19954A1 2001 EN 61000 3 11 2000 EN 60065 1998 Manufacturer Harman Specialty Group 3 Oak Park Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA The equipment identified here conforms to the Direc tive s and Standard s specified above Type of Equipment Digital Controller Model Lexicon RV 8 Date August 2005 Harman Specialty Group Vice President of Engineering 3 Oak Park Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0490 Appendix Lexicon MENU TREE MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 continued on page B 6 SPEAKER SETUP SETUP CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING continued on page B 8 POWER MANAGEMENT BROWNOUT PROTECT ON CAUTION IF SET TO OFF THIS ACTION WILL DISABLE INTERNAL BROWNOUT PROTECTION 1 0 CONFIG ANALOG INPUTS AMP OUTPUTS continued on page B 13 DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY A V SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME continued on page B 13 VOLUME CONTROL SETUP MAIN POWER 30dB MUTELEVEL 30dB 72 PWR ON 30dB Z3 PWR ON 304 HEADPHONE 30dB
215. ibration instruc tions LIVE cannot be used with prerecorded sources such as CDs or DVDs LIVE SMALL parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings MID RT 597ms 115ms to 15 4s BASS RT 597ms 23ms to 30 8ms ROLLO FF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz TREB CUT RT 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz PRE DELAY 10ms 10ms to 100ms ADVAN CED CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 LIVE SMALL ADVANCED parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings REVERB LVL 0dB 80dB to 40dB EARLY RFLX LVL 13dB 80dB to 12dB BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF SHAPE 0 0 to 4 SPREAD 0 0 to 100 SIZE 19m 4m to 60m 6 35 Adjust Lexicon I j P M py ange LIVE LARGE parameter settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings MID RT 1 84s 115ms to 15 45 MID RT 4715 li5msto 30 85 RESORT ades 10 BASS RT 4 715 23msto 30 8ms lt 22 d ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz caes SLOME to TREB CUT RT 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20kHz 08 POA PRE DELAY 20ms 10ms to 100ms eee ay ADVANCED CUION EIS ID DAE Ie CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 LIVE M ED ADVANCED parameter settings LIVE LARGE ADVANCED parameter settings P t Default Setti Possible Settings laid E 3 Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings REVERB LVL 4dB B to 0dB s ee REVERB LVL
216. ideo source is present MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS DVD1 AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS DVD2 TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SAT SETUP DISPLAYS VCR VOLUME CONTROLS TV TRIGGER cD TUNER SETUP TUNER LOCK OPTIONS PHONO LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT COMPONENT IN COMPONENT 1 to 3 VIDEO NONE Ed gt EI Opens the COMPONENT IN menu which is used to assign a component video input connector for the selected input The RV 8 has eight configurable inputs each of which can be assigned to any of its three component video input connectors Alternatively COMPONENT IN can be assigned to VIDEO This will cause the composite or S Video signal selected for the VIDEO IN parameter to be converted to component input The NONE setting shuts off the component output Note When the component is set to NONE black and blue lines appear on the screen if the monitor does not have auto sense DVD1 VIDEO IN COMPOSITE 1 COMPOSITE 2 COMPOSITE 3 COMPOSITE 4 COMPOSITE 5 S VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 4 S VIDEO 5 NONE b DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DVD1 DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOGIN NONE ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT IN 1 i FILM 5 1a FILM LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED DVD1 COMPONENT IN COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 3 VIDEO NONE 3 11 Setup Lexicon SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES Preferred listening modes can be pre selected so t
217. ier to ensure completed Press the arrow button to skip the countdown that speaker wires are connected and the amplifier is on and begin LIVE calibration The RV 8 automatically activates LIVE Run a Microphone Check to determine whether a microphone calibration when the countdown ends has been damaged See page 3 40 for instructions on check When the LIVE calibration is finished the LIVE CALIBRATION ing the microphones results screen displays one of the following two messages 3 83 4 4 Audio Controls Audio Controls ut ma 4 2 Audio Controls Lexicon AUDIO CONTROLS Selecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu which is used to customize the Main Zone audio output connectors and to control the balance of the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors The BASS TREBLE TILT EQ LOUDNESS BALANCE and FADER parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors including all Main Zone inputs and listening modes except the 5 1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors including all Zone 2 inputs The ZONE3 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors including all Zone inputs MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS MODE ADJUST BASS
218. ignal as it changes to that Device s function pages To program the one learned code onto the Device button 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen Important Press the PAGE button Place the original remote control head to head with the RV 8 remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface 5 Select any of the 10 device buttons to program onto the RV 8 remote Press the button on the original remote control to program into the Device button chosen on the RV 8 remote Once the RV 8 remote hasreceived the signal the RV 8 remote will flash GOOD on the LCD screen indicating it learned the code correctly If it flashes FAIL repeat from step 4 until it learns successfully sure to enter the code signal within 20 seconds of programming 6 Return to step 5 until all Device buttons have been programmed 7 When done programming press the HOME button to exit the Learning mode Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again C 8 RV 8 Appendix C Note Follow these instructions only if you actually want a code sent when changing devices It may not be desired to send out codes when changing to a device For example you program the RV 8 s TV input code on the TV device and are currently in the DVD device pages The RV 8 s input is set to DVD Now you want to quickly adjust the picture on t
219. ing the button to the right of the time just assigned 4 Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button Note The time entered in SETUP for the backlight to go off is extended each time a button is pushed The light will turn off at the predetermined interval after the last button has been pushed CLONING THE RV 8 REMOTE CONTROL To clone the remote from another remote 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the CLONE button next to the LCD screen Press either the SEND or RECV button depending upon the role of the remote control If the RV 8 remote is to be copied from press the SEND button If it is to be copied to press the button To clone the entire remote press the ALL button To clone only one device at a time press the DEVICE button Press the DEVICE button to show all of the devices Press the device button you wish to clone Set the RV 8 remote head to head with another RV 8 remote Each unit should be in either cloning from or cloning to mode based on the above steps Press the START button on both units to begin cloning It will take about 40 seconds to complete the cloning The LCD will flash GOOD upon completion Exit from the Cloning mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again Appendix Lexicon ADJUSTING THE LCD CONTRAST To adjust the LCD contrast
220. ing LIVE CALIBRATION See page 3 36 for instructions on running an automatic calibration Any changes to the LEVELS CALIBRATION or CROSSOVER SETUP in the SPEAKER SETUP menu will cause LIVE to become uncalibrated If power is lost during calibration of LIVE previous settings may be lost and recalibration of speaker levels and distances as well as LIVE is required The Bass Treble Tilt EQ and Loudness controls do not function when LIVE is running While LIVE is active the BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ parameters are shown in the AUDIO CONTROLS menu as set to 0 The LOUDNESS parameter is shown as set to OFF LIVE requires two microphones available in a kit from your authorized Lexicon dealer If you own the Lexicon four microphone kit there is no need to purchase the two microphone kit The microphones should be permanently mounted in the listening room Performing LIVE CALIBRATION with microphones other than those in the kit can produce undesirable results LIVE requires that a minimum of four speakers Front L R and either side L R or Rear L R be set up and connected to the amplifier If no subwoofer is present the crossover setting of the Front L R speakers should be set to FULL Proper microphone placement both during calibration and when running LIVE is essential to achieving the desired results Microphone placement instructions and illustrations are included in this section The location of the sound source piano
221. ing automatic calibration If the sig nals become too loud pressthe 4 arrow button to cancel automatic calibration Pressthe arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds The primary reason for the 10 second delay isto give you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins If you choose to remain in the room your movements could affect the calibration results If you leave the room you can return in about 10 minutes the calibration procedure should be completed arrow button to skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration The RV 8 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends 3 48 RV 8 Setup SETTING DISTANCES SETTING DISTANCES SETTING LEVELS SETTING LEVELS FRONT LEFT FRONT LEFT 12 0ft FRONT LEFT FRONT LEFT CENTER b CENTER 10 5ft CENTER a CENTER FRONT RIGHT FRONT RIGHT 12 0ft FRONT RIGHT FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT 4 58 SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT ERROR REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT REAR LEFT 6 0ft REAR LEFT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SIDE LEFT 4 5ft SIDE LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER NA SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER DISTANCES DISTANCES amp LEVELS The SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV 8 calibrates speaker distances This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is selected
222. input connector must be assigned when no analog audio input connector is assigned Refer to the next page Note for information about assigning an analog audio input The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM 44 1 48 connector 88 2 and 96kHz Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources The digital audio input connectors are not compatible with M PEG or M P3 sources Setup Lexicon ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV CD TUNER PHONO b DVD1 INPUT SETUP NAME DIGITAL IN ANALOGIN ANLG IN LVL VIDEO IN COMPONENT IN 2 CH 00 Cts ae E 5 1a 5 1a FILM MIC S VIDEO 1 5 1154 FILM LIVE MED ANALOG IN E373 gt EX Opens the ANALOG IN menu which is used to assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input The RV 8 has eight configurable inputs each of which can be assigned to any of its eight analog audio input connectors The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configu ration of the analog audio input connectors The ANALOG IN menu A above appears when the I O CONFIG menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected see page 3 60 The ANALOG IN menu B above appears when the I O CO
223. is activated When set to OFF the custom name does not appear when the RV 8 is activated The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUP menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu ON OFF OFF 1 to 60ms ON EDIT CUSTOM NAME OFF RV 8 E 9 t 4 BUTTONS TO EDIT UP TO 20 CHARACTERS BUTTON TO ADVANCE EDIT CUSTOM NAME Ez Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below which can be used to create a custom unit name When the CUSTOM parameter is set to ON the custom unit name appears in the on screen and front panel displays when the RV 8 is activated To customize the name of the RV 8 1 Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop down menu shown below 2 When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop down menu opens press the remote control and arrow buttons to change the character above the cursor 3 When the desired character has been selected pressthe arrow button to advance to the next character space The cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when the last character space is passed Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name 5 When the desired custom unit name has been entered press the arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop down menu and retum to the DISPLAY SETUP menu 3 67 Setup Lexicon VOLUME CONTROL SETUP gt Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu which is used to configure Main Zon
224. istening mode that was activated the last time a 5 1 channel analog source was present 5 1 MUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5 1 channel analog sources However when the 5 1a parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will activate 5 1a MUSIC if this listening mode was activated the last time a 5 1 channel analog source was present 3 16 RV 8 Setup CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT CD TUNER PHONO MAIN ADVANCED E gt i gt EZ Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens the MAIN ADV menu shown above The parameters on the left side of this menu are identical regardless of which input is selected The settings on the right side are adjustable Default parameter settings differ from input to input DVD1 INPUT SETUP DVD1 MAIN ADV DIGITAL b Fee IP M EIE ANALOG DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL AUTO DIGITAL IN COAX 1 ANALOG BYPASS ANALOG IN NONE S VIDEO 16 9 AUTO AUTO ANLG IN LVL AUTO S VIDEO OSD 4 3 ON OFF VIDEO IN S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT OSD OFF COMPONENT IN 1 LEGACY VIDEO A TT 2 CH Lei FILM FORMAT DETECT FAST OFF 000 5 115 FILM Eres ities FILM 5 1 5 1a FILM B MIC LIVE MED I MAIN ADV
225. ity 10mV Rms 400mV maximum input level Input Impedance 20 accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals FM Tuner Performance Bare Wire Up to 10 gauge bare wire Other Trigger Outputs One power on off and one programmable connector on detachable screw terminals 12 VDC 0 5 amps each Tuning Range 64M Hz to 108M Hz Usable Sensitivity lt AuV 1 6mv typical RS 232 Serial Input Output Two 9 pin D sub connectors A 3 Appendix Lexicon Other able power cord Power Requirements 120 230 VAC 50 60Hz 60W universal line input detach RV 8 Height with feet 7 76 inches 197 1mm Dimensions amp Width 17 3 inches 440mm Weight Depth 21 2 inches 538 48mm Weight 65 Ib 29 48kg Rack M ounting Optional brackets are available for installation in a stan dard 19 equipment rack two rack units required Environment Operating temperature 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F Storage temperature 30 to 75 22 to 167 Relative humidity 9596 maximum without condensation Remote Control Handheld backlit infrared remote control unit prepro grammed and learning Requires four AAA batteries alkaline batteries recom mended Specifications are subject to change without notice DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Application of Council Directive s 89 336 EEC and 93 68 EEC Standard s to W
226. kers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement during the microphone check of the microphones are positioned as close together as possible in an unobstructed location that is v equidistant from the front left and right speakers Microphone Subwoofer Front Right 3 38 RV 8 Setup IM PRO PER microphone positioning for the microphone check During the microphone check DO NOT X X Separate the microphones Scatter the microphones throughout the listening Space Obstruct the line of sight path between the micro phones and the speakers Position the microphones on the floor on seat cushions or in locations obstructed by fumiture and other fixtures where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals Position the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet 9 14m from any one speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check The microphones are scattered throughout the listening space rather than positioned as close together as possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left and right speakers Microphone 3 39 Setup Lexicon CHECKING THE MICROPHONES MAIN MENU b SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER PRESETS SETU
227. lby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected Note The RV 8 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources A non flagged input source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input signal The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged The Dolby DIGITAL listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX amp Dolby DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5 22 for more information Note the following Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present 6 41 Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued This parameter is available in 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes e When the Shift command bank is activated pressing the remote control DOLBY button while a 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode Subsequent presses adjust the EX DECODING parameter cycling through the AUTO ON and OFF settings FRONT STEERING OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM Adjusts front steering between the front
228. left front right and center speakers When set to FILM maximum front steering is applied to the center channel When set to MUSIC moderate front steering is applied When set to MSURR minimum front steering is applied When set to OFF no front steering is applied It is recommended that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources and to MUSIC MSURR or OFF for music sources Available in L7 TV L7 MUSIC L7 MUSIC SURR all 5 1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes INPUT BALANCE L to q gt to gt R Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input connectors compensating for audio input sources with audible channel imbalance Available in PANORAMA mode LFE MIX 20 0 or 10 0 to 40 0dB Controls the output level of LFE information the 1 channel in a 5 1 or 6 1 channel input source that is sent to the audio output labeled Subwoofer Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output signal which significantly increases subwoofer output levels Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload When the speaker setup does not include a subwoofer LFE information is mixed into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points Available in all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes 5 1 MONO LOGIC 5 1 MONO
229. lexicon RV 8 Receiver User Guide IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radia tors heat registers stoves or another apparatus including amplifiers that produces heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are pro vided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer apparatus To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture Do not place objects containing liquid such as vases on this This triangle which appears on your component 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used
230. lows 5 1 channel analog sources to use bass management speaker crossovers speaker distance calibration and audio controls tone controls When these features are not used the 5 1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode The 5 1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals with appropriate time delays to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 32 RV 8 Mode Adjust 5 la 2 CHANNEL gt This mode downmixes 5 1 channel analog input signals into 2 channel LOGIC7 encoded output signals It sends these signals to the front speakers and the subwoofer It is recommended for recording purposes particularly for recording from a DVD A or multi channel SACD player to a CD R or another 2 channel record ing format Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER MIX 0dB 25 to 5dB SURROUND MIX 0dB 5 to 5dB CNTRDLY SAMPLES 40 127 to 4127 MASTER LEVEL 0dB 5 to 5dB LFE MIX 0 0dB 20 0 to 40 0dB SUB L R LVL 0dB OFF 30 to 12dB CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1a BYPASS d Designed for playback of 5 1 channel analog sources such as DVD A or SA
231. lt REGION USA EUROPE JAPAN E EUR Parameter Possible Settings Setting Ex gt EXEI REGION USA USA EUROPE JAPAN E EUR Sets the tuner region The four regions are USA EUROPE JAPAN and SCAN SENS LOW LOW MED HIGH E EUR The table on the next page lists the band limits and incre AUTOLOAD N A N A ments for these regions CLEAR ALL N A N A Note TUNER PRESETS N A N A DISPLAY RDS NAME RDS NAME PRESET NAME The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered It FREQUENCY will always set at the closest valid frequency For example if the RV 8 has RADIO TEXT ON OFF USA set as the current region entering 107 8M Hz will result in 107 9M Hz being the actual tuner frequency If the value is less than the lowest SCROLL RATE MEDIUM SLOW MEDIUM FAST frequency it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region Likewise if AUTO FREQUENCY ON ON OFF the dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency it will actually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region 3 72 RV 8 Setup MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP TUNER SETUP LOW REGION MED SCAN SENS HIGH AUTOLOAD CLEAR ALL TUNER PRESETS DISPLAY RDS NAME RADIO TEXT SCROLL RATE MEDIUM AUTO FREQUENCY ON LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SCAN SENS ES gt Tuner serur gt EXE
232. m PP 2 15 Menu Navigation 2 15 Menu Item Selection 2 15 Remote Control Buttons 2 400000 2 17 Command Matrix 2 18 Understanding the 2 2 28 TwO Line Status lasa iiiad diaid ERES 2 28 STATUS M enis a neis tip AAW eee dene eg 2 29 STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions 2 34 STATUS Menu Level 2 44 2 35 Setup cap 3 2 Input Setup x tiit caen te e aati 3 4 Changing Input Names 3 5 Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors 3 7 Selecting Preferred Listening Modes 3 12 Configuring Advanced Input Settings 3 17 INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings 3 19 ZONE in Parameter 5 3 22 Speaker SetUD a ed d e s 3 25 Setting Crossover Points 2 3 25 Speaker Setup Parameters 3 29 Automatic Calibration sess 3 36 Manual Calibration sese 3 53 EST 3 60 Display SetU oL 3 63 On Screen Display 3 64 Front panel Display Setup
233. ments A horizontal bar graph indicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in the on screen and front panel displays The Main Zone volume range is 80 to 12dB To adjust the Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level 1 Press and hold the front panel Zone 2 or Zone 3 input selection button that corresponds with the current input source For instance if the current input source is using the DVD1 input press and hold the DVD1 input selection button in the desired zone 2 While holding the desired zone input selection button rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease volume level in 1dB increments jawanpi The corresponding horizontal graph appears in the on screen and front panel displays and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level falls within the 80 to 12dB volume range 3 Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level has been set Note When RV 8 output levels have been properly calibrated the 0dB volume level setting corresponds to THX reference levels 75dB 2 3 Basic Operation Lexicon FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW continued 4 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS Selects the corresponding input in the Main Zone When an input is selected a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection button When the Main Zone is deactivated pressing a Main Zone input selection button acti
234. meter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automatically activate a DTS Neo 6 listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a 2 channel source was present Note The RV 8 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO 6 listening mode unless a 44 1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present The DTS Neo 6 listening modes are not available with 88 2kHz or 96kHz Dolby Digital or analog sources The DTS Neo 6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the front panel or remote control M ode buttons The DTS N eo 6 CIN listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS button when a 2 channel input source is present Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 10 RV 8 Mode Adjust NIGHTCLUB gt The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of dry music sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording The NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to the front side and rear channels to simulate small intimate listening spaces The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 11 0 to 18 SPEECH
235. microphones At the approximate spot where the listener s head will be during listening 4 In a dear line of sight path with the speakers 4 alocation unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening positions in a single row Each micro phone is positioned in a single listening position within a single row allowing the RV 8 to calibrate optimal v speaker distances and output levels for that row at the expense of a single listening position Microphone Center Subwoofer 3 44 RV 8 Setup PRO PER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows When for multiple listening positions in multiple rows position the microphones v At the approximate spot where the listener s head will be during listening 4 In a dear line of sight path with the speakers 4 n alocation unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all speakers The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement whe
236. minimize interference and unnatural echo in monaural speech When stereo input sources are present the front left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience synthesis When strong monaural speech is present in the input source the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the stereo component of the effect is increased When set to OFF the amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes SPREAD 0 to 10096 Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly create the sound of a real room SHAPE and SPREAD work together if either is set to 0 the other has no effect Available in all LIVE modes SUB amp SUB LVL OFF 30 to 12dB Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer The SUB parameter appears on the listening mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu The SUB LVL parameter appears on listening mode menus when the listening mode does not accom modate multichannel output signals Available in all except LIVE modes SURR ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF Applies high frequency attenuation control to the audio output connectors labeled Side L R and Rear L R This filter is only applied to output signals generated by the RV 8 Available in all Logic 7 modes SURROUND DLY Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the arrival time of signals from the side and rea
237. mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen Press the FAV button and then the favorite channel button on which you wish to write text There are five LCD pages of favorite channels Select the page you wish to write on by pressing the PAGE button The character to be changed on the button you selected will blink and you can change the character using the number pad buttons on the remote control The characters assigned to each number pad button are shown in the previous column It will cycle to a different character each time the same number pad button is pressed Save the edited text by pressing the same function button selected in step 4 Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again RECALLING THE PREPROGRAMMED THREE DIGIT NUM BER 1 5 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen The LCD display will alternately flash device names and the three digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then exit to the SETUP mode Before the 10 seconds are up pressing the HOME button on the remote will stop the flashing and exit to the SETUP mode Exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again ERASING LEARNED BUTTONS To erase learned buttons 1 Go
238. mparison between original and calibrated output levels allowing selection of the desired values Calibrates individual speaker output levels within 0 5dB of each other and overall speaker output levels within 3 0dB of THX reference levels 75dB 3 36 RV 8 Setup CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES CAUTION The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit require careful handling Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or irreparable damage to the microphones The microphone wires also require careful handling Do not sharply bend the wires or place objects on them Never make or break microphone input connections unless the RV 8 is powered off with the rear panel power switch OR standby mode is activated with the front panel or remote control standby button Note the following Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit available at authorized Lexicon dealers Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than those in the kit will produce unpredictable results Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired automatic calibration results Pay particular attention to the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included in this section It is important to read and observe the care and handling documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to ensure optimal microph
239. n calibrating for multiple listening positions in multiple rows Each micro phone is positioned in a single listening position within a row allowing the RV 8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for larger listening area at the expense of a single listening position Microphone Center Subwoofer 3 45 Setup Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued IM PRO PER microphone positioning for automatic calibration During the automatic calibration do not X Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of the listening positions or space X Position the microphones in spots where the listeners heads will not be during listening X Obstruct the line of sight path between the microphones and the speakers X Position the microphones on the floor on seat cushions or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals X Position the microphones within 2 feet 0 61m of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet 9 14m from any one speaker The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check The microphones are positioned on the floor along the perimeter of the listening space making it difficult for the RV 8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for the actual listening positions Microphone
240. n the input source the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding 1 PresMODEADJUST gt FTFfzs THX 5 DECODING 2 Usethe or arrow to select either AUTO the default or OFF When the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF the DTS ES THX UL2 Cin listening mode is always active When the parameter is set to AUTO the DTS ES THX UL2 Cin listening mode activates when a 5 1 channel DTS source is detected When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated Adaptive decorrelation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space De correlation of the mono surround channel increasesthe perceived width of the surround field in home theaters ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 35 for more information The DTS ES THX listening mode The DTS ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and DTS ES decoding is active DTS ES decoding is activated when the E5 DECODING parameter is set to AUTO the default or ON and a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is detected The table on the next page showsthe conditions for the behavior of the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS ES THX m
241. ndix Lexicon VCR Manufacturer SANYO SCOTT SEARS SHARP SHINTOM SIGNATURE SONY SOUNDESIGN SIS SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC TANDY TATUNG TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA THOMAS TMK TOSHIBA TOTEMSION UNITECH VECTOR RESEARCH VICTOR VIDEO CONCEPTS VIDEOSONIC WARDS YAM AHA ZENITH Codes 003 007 010 014 134 102 017 037 112 129 131 003 008 009 010 013 014 081 101 017 073 112 031 054 149 159 165 024 034 003 031 052 056 057 058 076 077 078 149 154 034 013 031 034 059 067 034 010 034 039 043 034 039 043 031 070 019 031 034 101 034 006 008 013 042 047 059 079 082 112 131 081 040 101 040 012 048 012 034 046 141 040 003 013 017 024 031 034 040 053 054 131 012 034 039 043 034 048 056 058 072 080 101 TV Manufacturer ADMIRAL AKAL AMARK AMPRO AMSTRAD ANAM AOC AUDIOVOX BLAUPUNKT CAIRN CANDLE CAPEHART CETRONIC CITIZEN CLASSIC CONCERTO CONTEC CORONADO CRAIG CROWN CURTIS MATHES CXC DAEWOO DAYTRON DWIN DYNASTY DYNATECH EKI ELECTROHOME EM ERSON FISHER Codes 072 081 161 160 197 146 112 143 073 167 157 183 052 043 054 056 080 112 131 197 004 112 058 076 088 201 197 002 003 004 058 043 197 002 003 004 043 101 103 143 043 004 043 050 051 143 043 054 043 143 197 101 004 143 043 004 016 043 044 076 103 114 125 127 143 004 143 177 043 062 187 024 076 143 196 197 004 005 028 043 047 048 050 051 076 096 143 151 153 154 155 007
242. ndowsill or any location exposed to direct sunlight Do NOT obstruct the front panel IR receiver window The remote control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper operation Do NOT install the RV 8 on a surface that is unstable or unable to support all four feet CAUTION Before moving the RV 8 power the unit off using the rear panel power switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Getting Started Lexicon REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION The remote control requires four AAA batteries The batteries should be replaced as needed Alkaline batteries which last longer without leaking are recommended When battery power is low the remote control enters a low voltage condition preventing it from operating the RV 8 When this occurs replace the batteries Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed To replace the remote control batteries 1 Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control Press the tab 1 and lift the cover 2 away from the remote control Remove old batteries if applicable Observing the proper polarity insert four AAA batteries 3 Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place 4 gt N Dispose of the old batteries if applicable 1 6 E Basic Operation Front Panel Overview 2 2 Rear Panel Overview
243. ne BASS parameter Adjust bar in 5dB increments Selectsthe TUNERinput Decreases the AUDIO Activates RT 10 or Opensthe RT 10 or for Zone 3 CONTROLS menu Main RT 20 random RT 20 Angle bar Zone TREBLE parameter playback in 5dB increments Selects the DVD1 input Decreases the AUDIO Activates RT 10 or Activates the RT 10 or for Zone 3 CONTROLS menu Main RT 20 repeat playback RT 20 condition ZoneTILT EQ parameter memory mode in 2dB increments Selects the DVD2 input Deactivates AUDIO Activates RT 10 or Activates the RT 10 or for Zone 3 CONTROLS menu Main RT 20 repeat RT 20 last memory Zone LOUDNESS playback playback parameter Selects the Satellite Reserved for future Opens the RT 10 or Creates up to five input for Zone 3 expansion RT 20 Setup menu shortcuts for frequently adjusted RT 10 or RT 20 Setup menu parameters 2 19 Basic Operation Lexicon 9 Selects the Selectsthe VCR Selects the L7 Selects the VCR Adjusts the Audio command bank which input for the Music listening input for Zone 2 Controls menu Main P includes commands Main Zone mode Zone BALANCE that control the VCR parameter to the right 10 Selects the TV Selects the TV Selects L7 TV SelectstheTV input Sets the Main Zone command bank which input for the listening mode for Zone 2 volume level to includes commands Main Zone 30dB that control the TV 11 Selects th
244. ne check is required before automatic calibration can be performed Automatic Options Details MICROPHONE CHECK Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning e Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors allowing the RV 8 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration e Ensures that microphone levels are consistent eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual microphone levels DISTANCES amp LEVELS Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction automatically applying calibrated speaker distances and output levels Calibrates speaker distances within 0 5 foot 15m of the physical distance between the primary listening position and the speaker Calibrates individual speaker output levels within 0 5dB of each other overall speaker output levels within 4 3 0dB of THX reference levels 75dB DISTANCES Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances allowing selection of the desired values Calibrates speaker distances within 0 5 foot 15m of the physical distance between the primary listening position and the speaker LEVELS Activates automatic calibration of output levels Provides a co
245. nect a recording device For recording use the output connector labeled Fix which provides a fixed output level of 4OdB If output level adjustment is needed use the output labeled Var and adjust the Zone 2 volume Note When using an analog input source the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio outputs are approximately 2dB lower than the M ain audio outputs labeled Front L R When using a digital input source the Zone 2 audio outputs are approximately 6dB higher than the M ain audio outputs labeled Front L R This is to accommodate THX level requirements 8 TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORS Provide two antenna connections for the AM FM stereo radio tuner 9 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS S PDIF Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone or Zone 2 Four S PDIF coaxial and four S PDIF optical Toslink input connectors are available Connectors are compatible with PCM 44 1 48 88 2 and 96kHz Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources Connectors are not compatible with MPEG M P3 sources 10 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS Provides microphone input for automatic calibration 11 PHONO INPUT CONNECTORS Provide a phono level input which can be assigned to any of the eight RV 8 inputs A 2 channel analog bypass path is available with RIAA curve A ground connector is also provided The phono input is optimized for moving magnet phono cartridges 12 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide 12V DC output to control connected components Two trigger o
246. nels present in the input source The first digit indicates the number of front channels present The digit after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE low frequency effects information For instance if the parameter setting is 3 2 1 an input source with three front channels two surround channels and LFE information is present LFE information is sent to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 0 and 1 0 Possible settings for DTS ES input sources include 3 3 1 and 3 2 1 DIALOG OFFSET Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below full scale 27dBFS When the dialog normalization value of the incoming signal is higher or lower the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the amount of adjustment the RV 8 makes to normalize dialog to 27dBFS 27 to 44dB ES ENCODING DISCRETE MATRIX OFF Indicates whether or not a DTS ES encoded source is detected When the parameter setting is DISCRETE a discrete 6 1 channel DTS ES source is detected When the parameter setting is MATRIX a 5 1 channel DTS ES source with a surround encoded back channel is detected When the parameter setting is NONE a standard DTS source with no DTS ES encoding is detected EX ENCODING MATRIX NO
247. ng mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present Note The 5 1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EX DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 21 Adjust Lexicon DOLBY DIGITAL amp DOLBY DIGITAL EX D on These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5 1 discrete channels from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources The five main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of 120Hz The mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding This listening mode can also be used with other types of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is avail
248. ng mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTS encoded sources when listening through headphones No param eters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available HEADPHONE 5 1a HEADPHONE 5 1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of 5 1 channel analog music or film sources through headphones This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones The HEADPHONE 5 1a listening mode is recommended for 5 1 channel analog sources when listening through headphones No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5 1a listening mode are available LIVE SMALL LIVE MED amp LIVE LARGE gt on on LIVE Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment is a proprietary mode designed to transform the way your listening room sounds It provides a realistic illusion of a larger more reverberant listening space LIVE SMALL simulates the reverberations of a room that is small but larger than an average living room LIVE MED simulates the reverberations of a small hall LIVE LARGE simulates the reverberations of a large hall LIVE requires two permanently mounted microphones See LIVE CALIBRATION on page 3 80 for placement and cal
249. ng the LEVELS option opens the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below SPEAKER FRONT LEFT ERROR SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE SPEAKER SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW CENTER 0 0ft Misc 0 0ft 1 13010 0 0ft REAR RIGHT 0 0ft REAR LEFT 0 0 SPEAKER SIDE LEFT 0 0ft UNABLE TO CALCULATE SUBWOOFER 0 0ft SPEAKER SPEAKER MAY NOT BE ACCURATE OK SPEAKER SIGNAL TOO LOW B 7 Appendix Lexicon SETUP MENU SPEAKERS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETTING DISTANCES FRONT LEFT 0 0ft CENTER 0 0ft FRONT RIGHT 0 0ft SIDE RIGHT 0 0ft REAR RIGHT 0 0ft REAR LEFT 0 0ft SIDE LEFT 0 0ft SUBWOOFER 0 0ft SET DISTANCES AUTO DISTANCES ORIGINAL DISTANCES SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT SPEAKER SETUP SET CROSSOVERS CHECK MICROPHONES AUTOMATIC MANUAL SET CROSSOVERS BEFORE CALIBRATING PT FOR AUTO CALIBRATION MIC CHECK REQUIRED The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates the individual calibration results for each speaker Press the 4 and arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter Then press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker ORIGINAL DISTANCES APPLIED
250. nment system You can create your own button labels on the LCD screen program 50 favorite channel buttons operate the volume channel and transport buttons from one device when you are in another device and perform multiple tasks with the press of a single button The RV 8 remote control features extensive preprogrammed IR codes for practically all major audio and video equipment It can set up and operate various components by simply entering a threedigit code number assigned to the brand of component The code numbers for the various brands of components are listed beginning on page C 18 Refer to the programming instructions on page C 5 for additional information DEVICE ACTIVATION In addition to controlling the RV 8 the remote is designed to operate up to seven components including Satellite Boxes TV DVD LD VCR CD and Phono Remote control buttons perform different commands depending on whether the Main Zone Zone 2 Zone 3 or another device is activated However each of the device buttons and corresponding functions cab be changed to meet individual requirements The Phono function could be used to operate lighting controls the second DVD DVD2 could be changed to operate a second TV etc Each device button on the main screen contains two subpages of commands and the name of any LCD button can be changed using up to five alphabet characters numbers and symbols to customize the unit to fit your audio video devices Refer
251. nt Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode The DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded film sources To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode play the 2 channel source input and select the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode using the front panel or remote control Mode buttons When the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automat ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded film source was present Note The DOLBY PLIIx M US mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings PANORAMA OFF ON OFF CTR WIDTH 3 MIN 1 to 6 MAX DIM ENSION NEUTRAL FRONT NEUTRAL REAR SURROUND 10 5 0 to 15ms OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions RV 8 Mode Adjust DOLBY PL THX This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources and decodes four channels three front channels and one mono surround channel with a high frequency rolloff above 7kHz This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX certified speakers Dolb
252. ntion to safety instructions The following symbols are used in the document Appears on the component to indicate the pres ence of uninsulated dangerous voltage inside Ex the enclosure voltage that may be sufficient to Represents a menu path The menu items in gray boxes must be constitute a risk of shock selected with the remote control Menu arrow to access the menu or menu item in the black box For example the SETUP Appears on the component to indicate impor INPUTS and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the tant operating and maintenance instructions in DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu the accompanying literature The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will Calls attention to a procedure practice condi continue to be used as an example throughout this document tion or the like that if not correctly performed Whenever it appears any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substi or adhered to could result in injury or death tuted Likewise whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path any other input may be substituted CAUTION Calls attention to a procedure practice condi tion or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage or destruction to part or all of the product Note Calls attention to information that is essential to highlight This document uses the term DTS ES to indicate that DTS ES encoding may or may no
253. o DM IX When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL the unit recognizes DTS encoded discs as audio signals not data signals and outputs loud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS ES sources Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to the corresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV 8 The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone and the analog connectors for Zone 2 3 21 Setup Lexicon ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGS DIGITAL ANLG Analog DMIX Downmix The RV 8 automatically sets the ZONE2 IN parameter to DIGITAL when the ANALOG IN parameter is set to NONE The RV 8 sends the assigned DIGITAL IN connector specified in the INPUT SETUP menu to the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS Only PCM digital input sources are compatible with ZONE 2 analog audio outputs Dolby Digital and DTS sources are compatible with the Zone 2 digital audio output when the DIG BYPASS parameter is set to ON Audio will not be available in Zone 2 analog outputs when a Dolby Digital DTS ES or unknown digital input source is present The ANALOG IN connector specified in the INPUT SETUP menu is sent to the ZONE2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS Only Front L R Audio will be available in Zone 2 when one
254. o REAR Side L R and Rear L R output levels are not attenuated preserving the intended balance of the sound field Available in all Logic 7 modes 6 44 RV 8 Mode Adjust SOURCE RIGHT LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode external calibration source signal When RIGHT is selected the sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening position When LEFT is selected the sound is perceived to come from the left of the primary listening position When LEFT amp RIGHT is selected the sound is perceived to come from all around the primary listening position Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6 13 for more information about the SOURCE parameter Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION Note The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound although both the front left and right speakers generate the external calibration source signal SPEAKER ANGLE 10 to 90deg Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the primary listening position Select the setting closest to the angle between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening position Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6 13 for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION SPEECH DETECT ON OFF Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources When set to ON effects are lowered to
255. o channels can be assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3 Signal to Noise Ratio 101dB minimum 22kHz bandwidth Input Sensitivity Input Impedance 200mV Rms 4V Rms for maximum output level 100ko in parallel with 150pF Main Zone Audio Performance Preamp Output Level 200mV Rms typical 4V Rms maximum Maximum value with full scale input signal and volume at OdB A D Conversion 24 Bit 96kHz dual bit AX architecture D A Conversion 24 Bit 44 1 to 192kHz multibit AX architecture Preamp Output Impedance 300 in parallel with 150pF Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz 0 1dB 0 1dB 0 25dB at 40kHz 0 5dB at 40kHz reference 1kHz THD Noise Below 0 0296 20Hz to 20kHz 140W Rms all channels driven Video Input amp Output Connectors Dynamic Range 105dB minimum 22kHz bandwidth A weighted 102dB minimum 22kHz bandwidth unweighted Signal to Noise Ratio 105dB minimum 22kHz bandwidth A weighted 102dB minimum 22kHz bandwidth unweighted Video Inputs Five composite five S Video and three component video RCA Video Outputs Two composite RCA one monitor and one Zone 2 two S Video one monitor and one Zone 2 and one component RCA A 2 RV 8 Appendix A Composite amp S Video Performance FM Tuner Performance Selectivity gt 87dBmV 93dBmv typical Frequency Res
256. o function to the 10 device buttons 1 Goto the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENTER buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen Important Press the PAGE button Press one of the 10 device buttons gt Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro button you selected in the order you want them stored Up to 20 commands can be stored Note Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro or it will not work The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro 6 Besureto end your macro on the Device page that you would like to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use C 10 RV 8 Appendix C 7 Retum to step 4 until all desired commands are programmed Save the commands selected to the macro button by pressing the CH UP button 9 Once you complete the programming and wish to exit from this mode press the HOME button Exit from the SET UP mode by pressing the HOME button once again Tip Remember that a single push of a Device Button that has a macro connected to it will take you to that device s function pages Hold the Device Button down for one second in order to send the macro that you have created for that Device Button Note Pressing the PAUSE button bottom right of cursor pad during the macro programming will add a time delay of 0 2 seconds between the commands For example pressing the PAUSE button
257. occurred A value indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure An ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated but at least one error occurred during the calibration proce dure Pressthe a or arrow button to high light the speaker calibration parameter you want Then press the button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker A message similar to the one shown above will display Refer to the table on page 3 52 for infor mation about all possible speaker calibra tion messages This menu is displayed but not user accessible during Auto Distance Calibra tion or after Auto Calibration An ERROR message indicates that values were calculated but at least one error occurred during calibration Press the a arrow button to high light the desired calibration procedure DISTANCES displays the AUTO DIS TANCES screen shown in the left column of this table LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen shown in the right column of this table Press the gt arrow button to select this procedure Refer to the instructions in the appropri ate column to view more detailed results for each individual speaker If a speaker is highlighted in either the Distances or Levels menus the speaker name is displayed during the calibration procedure An ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated but at least one error occurred during the calibration proce dure
258. ode and to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode Available in all modes CUSTOM VS PRESET Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory default versions of the selected listening mode Refer to page 5 32 for information Available in all modes DIMENSION FRONT NEUTRAL REAR Controls the relative balance of the sound field which can be useful with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among all speakers When set to FRONT the sound field is balanced toward the front of the listening space When set to NEUTRAL the sound field is balanced at the center of the listening space When set to REAR the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening space Available in Dolby PUI MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes 6 40 RV 8 Mode Adjust EARLY RFLX LVL 80dB to 12dB OFF Controls the amount of additional early reflections Available in all LIVE modes EFFECT LVL 12 to 46dB Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC modes ES DECODING AUTO ON OFF Controls DTS ES decoding which extracts a rear channel from 5 1 channel DTS 5 1 channel matrix encoded DTS ES and 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES sources When ON is selected DTS ES decoding is activated for all DTS ES sources When OFF is selected DTS ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS ES sou
259. ode is lost when switching between inputs When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode and a dynamic listening mode or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu is active the selected listening mode is retained when switching between inputs even when the RV 8 is set to standby as in the following example Select Main Menu gt SETUP gt INPUTS gt DVD1 gt 2 CH gt USELAST Press the MENU button Press the DVD 1 button Play a 2 channel input source Press the MODE button until you reach MOV PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode 6 Pressthe TV button The RV 8 switches to the TV input and the on screen display identifies the preferred listening mode 7 Pressthe DVD 1 button The on screen display should identify that the active listening mode for the DVD1 input is still PLIIx MOV This is the only method of setting up a dynamic mode or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu to behave like a preferred listening mode Note When a dynamic mode or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu is set as in the above example the setting is retained even when the RV 8 is set to standby 3 14 RV 8 Setup 2 CH DOLBY D gt Ind gt Er gt E ma ET gt Br Opens the 2 CH MODE menu which is used to select a preferred listening mode for 2 channel input sources The RV 8 activates the selected listening mode whenever
260. odes when activated Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB ES DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 6 27 Adjust Lexicon DTS ES THX amp DTS THX UL2CIN continued Input Source F 5 1 Channel 6 1 Channel SOULE Matrix Encoded DTS ES Discrete Encoded DTS ES ES DECODING AUTO DTS THX UL2Cin DTS ES THX DTS ES THX ES DECODING ON DTS ES THX DTS ES THX DTS ES THX ES DECODING OFF DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX MUSIC The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel DTS music sources when the side and rear speakers are present ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 35 for more information This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX certified speaker setups Option Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Note The DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode and can only be activated with the front p
261. of purchase To do so complete and return this card or register online at www lexicon com Retain the sales receipt for proof of coverage lexicon Harman International Company C Nr C Mrs c Ms C Miss gt Single c Married C Divorced lt gt Widowed First Name Last Name Company Title Mailing Address City State Zip Telephone Number Fax Number Email Address Product Model Purchase Date Version Serial Number Where did you purchase this product Age Education Household Income C Under 18 lt gt High School lt Under 20 000 C 18 24 gt College lt 20 000 to 34 999 C 25 34 lt gt Graduate School lt 35 000 to 49 000 C 35 49 C Certificate lt gt 50 000 to 74 999 lt 50 64 lt gt 75 000 to 99 000 C 65 lt gt 100 000 How did you learn about this product Choose one gt Friend lt gt Store salesperson lt gt Advertisement lt gt Colleague c Store display c Magazine Article lt gt Teacher lt gt Received as a gift lt gt Own other Lexicon products Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product lt gt Sound lt gt Quality lt gt Value for price lt gt Durability lt Features c Brandname lt gt Other What are your three favorite magazines 1 2 3 What are your three favorite websites 1 2 3 What features would you like to see added to this product in the future
262. of the 5 1 analog inputs is selected for the Main Zone Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output connectors Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital DTS ES and 5 1a sources To generate a downmix the same input must be selected in the Main Zone and Zone 2 Otherwise the Zone 2 audio output connectors will mute Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio output connectors For instance when the MONO listening mode is activated in the Main Zone the Zone 2 audio output connectors will generate mono output signals It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built in Dolby Digital or DTS ES decoding to a VCR or PVR e g Tivos or Replay TVs A 2 channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent to the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital DTS ES and 5 1 analog input sources To generate a downmix the input that is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the Main Zone e g DVD1 Otherwise the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute Downmixes cannot be generated when the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is selected in the Main Zone 3 22 RV 8 Setup ZONE2 ADVANCED gt Opens the ZONE2 IN menu which is used to configure advanced MAIN MENU SETUP INPUT SETUP gt
263. og stereo audio input connectors Auto switching between digital and analog audio input connectors Headphone output with LOGIC7 processing Two 32 bit DSP engines for custom processing Separate DSP engine for decoding compressed audio sources Four S PDIF coaxial and four S PDIF optical Toslink digital audio input connectors One S PDIF coaxial and one S PDIF optical Toslink digital audio output connectors 24 Bit 192kHz D A converters for all audio channels Two sets of analog A V Zone 2 outputs one fixed one variable One set of analog Zone 3 outputs variable level Broadcast quality video switching Video up conversion from S video composite to component video Automatic and manual calibration of speaker distances and output levels Three component video input connectors with full HDTV compatibility Five composite video input connectors Five S Video input connectors One component video output Logic 7 decoding Two 32 bit DSP engines LIVE Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Pro Logic Ilx and Dolby Pro Logic decoding DTS 96 24 DTS NEO 6 and DTS ES discrete and matrix decoding THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding THX Ultra2 certification RS 232 control Two trigger output connectors Rear panel IR input connector Two microphone input connectors Two internal expansion slots Removable access panel Flash memory software upgrade capa
264. on function or device buttons 1 Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen Press the DEVICE button to display the function buttons for that device Press the function button on which you wish to write or edit text You can also to the second page of the device by press ing the PAGE button C 13 Appendix Lexicon 5 edit DEVICE button text skip Steps 3 and 4 and press the PAGE 6 button before selecting the Device button The character to be changed will blink To change the character use the number pad buttons on the remote control The characters assigned to each number pad button are shown below It will cycle to a different character each time the same number pad button is pressed Note Move the cursor left or right using the joystick Delete a current character by using the cursor down on the joystick Using the cursor down technique is a quick way to delete all of the text on a label 3 GHI 4 7 STU 8 VWX 2 DEF 6 PQR Save the text by pressing the button you were writing on the same function button selected in step 3 or device button in step 4 Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again EDIT TEXT FOR FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS To edit text for favorite channel buttons 1 Go to the SETUP
265. one performance If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels or speaker distances previous settings may be lost and recali bration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required To connect the microphones 4 Makesure the RV 8 is powered off OR in standby mode 5 Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit to the microphone input connectors on the RV 8 rear panel Make sure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection During the microphone check the microphones will be referred to as 1 or 2 based on the input connector to which the microphone is connected You should label the micro phones for troubleshooting purposes 6 Power on the RV8 or deactivate standby mode 3 37 Setup Lexicon POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check PRO PER microphone positioning for the microphone check During the microphone check position the microphones V As close together as possible Relatively centered between and equidistant from the front left and right speakers X In a clear line of sight path with the speakers V n alocation unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals V At least 2 feet 0 61m from all speakers and walls but within 30 feet 9 14m of all spea
266. ons 6 16 RV 8 Mode Adjust 5 1 L7 TV Lamm BENI This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded broadcast sources Based on the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode 5 1 L7 TV derives seven channels from 5 1 channel input sources with enhanced front steering Parameter VOCAL ENHANCE 40 0dB FRONT STEERING FILM Default Setting Possible Settings 46 0dB 3 0dB 40 0dB OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE REAR REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKRENHANCE ON ON OFF BASS ENHANCE OFF ON OFF SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms COMPRESSION OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 500HZ to 20kHz OFF OFF 1ms to 30ms AUTO ON OFF 10 0dB to 0 0dB See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions 5 1 L7 MUSIC rz gt BETIS This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital encoded music sources Based on the 5 1 L7 FILM listening mode 5 1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from 5 1 channel input sources with enhanced front steering Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings VOCAL ENHANCE 0 0dB 6 0dB 43 0dB 40 0dB FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF MSURR MUSIC FILM RE EQUALIZER OFF ON OFF SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR NEUTRAL FRONT 5 SPKR ENHANCE ON OFF BASS ENHANCE O
267. or 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded sources To activate this listening mode play the 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded source then select DOLBY PLIIx THX using the front panel or remote control Mode buttons When the 2 CH parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automat ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx THX listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a 2 channel Dolby Surround encoded source was present Note The PLIIx mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions RV 8 Mode Adjust DOLBY PLIIx MOV amp DOLBY PLII MOVIE Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6 1 or 7 1 channel six or seven speakers and a subwoofer surround sound from any native two channel stereo or 5 1 channel source Dolby PLIIx MOV and Dolby PLII MOVIE modes Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic decoding Are appropriate for Dolby Surround encoded film sources The PLIIx listening mode is only available w
268. or the cable provider for assistance Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem Once the problem is identified make sure the associated component is properly grounded and connected to the same electrical circuit as the RV 8 The RV 8 is powered on but there is no video 1 Examine the video cables particularly the S Video cables to ensure a good connection to the associated component RV 8 Troubleshooting and M aintenance 2 Checkthe INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN page 3 11 parameters to ensure the appropriate video connector is assigned to the selected input RF interference is present in the audio or video 1 Make sure the RV 8 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM antennas cable TV decoders and other RF emitting devices 2 Replaceunshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible The RV 8 is exhibiting erratic behavior 1 Settherear panel power switch to the off position Wait 10 seconds Then set the rear panel power switch to the position 2 Use the RV 8 configuration tool to download the current RV 8 configuration to a personal computer PC or document all user defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on page D 2 Then follow the instructions on the next page to restore factory default settings If all else fails 1 Document all user defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on page D 2 Th
269. original dated sales receipt must be presented whenever warranty service is required Do not include accessories such as power cords or user guides unless instructed to do so What are the Warranties Any implied warranties including warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose are limited in duration to the length of this warranty Limitations of Implied Harman Specialty Group Tel 781 280 0300 3 Oak Park Fax 781 280 0490 Bedford MA 01730 1413 www lexicon com USA What Certain Damages are Excluded Harman Specialty Group s liability for a defective product is limited to repair or replacement of that product at our option Harman Specialty Group shall not be liable for damages based on inconvenience loss of use of the product loss of time interrupted operation commercial loss or any other damages whether incidental consequential or otherwise How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties and or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages As such the above limitations may not apply This warranty is not enforceable outside of North America This provides specific legal rights Additional rights may be provided by some states Customer Service Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0495 Sales Fax 781 280 0499 Service PRODUCT REGISTRATION Please register this product within 15 days
270. ote has 10 device buttons which can send out a series of up to 20 programmed commands when pressed for more than one second These buttons are commonly used in sending audio input codes when you pressthe button to go to a device The audio receiver would make an automatic input switch according to the device button pressed However these buttons can be programmed with any desired macro Up to 50 favorite channel buttons can be programmed into the RV 8 remote Each of these buttons can send out up to 10 commands Refer to Programming Favorite Channels on page 9 for more information Note The last Device selected will remain active when on the HOME page and will be shown at the bottom of the LCD screen For example if you are using TV and then return to the HOME page the hard buttons remain in TV mode The LCD buttons only change when another device is selected The remote can be set up to operate audio component volume control buttons UP DOWN and MUTE while all the other buttons control other equipment The remote can also be set up to operate channel control and transport functions PLAY STOP REWIND FAST FORWARD SKIP 5 PAUSE and RECORD buttons from VCR DVD LD CD or any other mode while all other buttons in the remote control are controlling other components See page C 12 for more information C 3 Appendix Lexicon REMOTE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW The first task is to get all original remote controls
271. ou use front side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of 40Hz or lower ON OFF BASS RT 5ms to 48 6s Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time required for low frequency information to decay below 60dB in level The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces CAUTION Setting the BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio BASS XOVER Sets the frequency to which BASS RT applies 30Hz to 19 9kHz OFF CALIBRATION Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu which is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode Refer to PANORAMA on page 6 13 for more information 6 39 Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued CENTER OFF 30 to 12dB Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center Available in all except 2 CH modes 2 CHANNEL 2 CH BYPASS DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 MONO and LIVE modes CENTER DEPTH 01018 Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel changing the perceived distance of the center speaker Higher settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance of the center speaker from the listening position Available in NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes CENTER MIX
272. ows Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency Select NAME to customize the preset name The preset name can be up to eight characters long Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band informa tion from the preset See Tuner Presets on page 5 2 for additional information AUTOLOAD The RV 8 can automatically scan and store presets This can be accomplished only from the remote control See Tuner Setup continued on page 3 74 for additional information To start autoloading 1 Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU SETUP TUNER SETUP menu 2 Pressmenu to start AUTOLOAD 2 12 RV 8 Basic Operation AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW The RV 8 features a 7 channel power amplifier with 140W per channel The RV 8 can be configured so that all amplifier channels are dedicated to the Main Zone or so that outputs 3 and 7 labeled Rear Right and Rear Left are used for Zone 2 or Zone 3 Heavy duty gold plated 5 way binding posts are provided for speaker connections The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protection for each channel Thermal protection monitors the temperature of the chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specific channel s when they exceed their normal safe operating temper ature Current protection ensures that the output transistors are protected by limiting the current capability which is determined by the output voltage while DC protection prev
273. parameter 3 14 V VIDEO IN parameter 3 11 video input connectors 2 7 video output connectors 2 7 VOCAL ENHANCE parameter 6 4 6 5 6 16 6 17 6 26 6 29 6 30 6 46 VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu 3 2 3 68 volume knob 2 3 W WORD LENGTH parameter 2 35 2 Z2 PWR ON parameter 3 68 Z3 PWR ON parameter 3 69 Zone 2 Off button 2 5 Zone 2 selection buttons 2 4 Zone 3 Off button 2 5 Zone 3 selection buttons 2 4 ZONE2 ADVANCED inputs 3 23 ZONE2 BALANCE parameter 4 2 4 2 ZONE2 IN parameter 3 21 ZONE2 IN parameter settings 3 22 Zones understanding 2 28 LIMITED WARRANTY Harman Specialty Group offers the following warranty on this product What is the Duration of this Warranty This warranty will remain in effect for three 3 years from the original date of purchase Who is Covered This warranty may be enforced by the original pur chaser and subsequent owners during the warranty period provided the original dated sales receipt or other proof of warranty coverage is presented at time of service What is Covered This warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship on this product except as specified below The following are not covered 1 Damage resulting from Accident misuse abuse or neglect Failure to follow instructions contained in the user guide Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by Harman Specialty Group Failure to perform recommended periodic maintenance Causes o
274. pens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the M ain Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup Use THX certified speakers in a THX speaker setup CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP SETUP SPEAKER SETUP INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS K VAN D TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS s TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup Use THX certified speakers a THX speaker setup When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens Press the arrow button to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup The THX SETUP menu will open on the in screen display Press the lt arrow button to close the message without config uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup THX SPEAKER SETUP THX SETUP PRESSING THE RIGHT gt CENTER THX 80 Hz AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE REAR L R THX 80 Hz THE OUTPUTS TO A THX CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP ICAUTION FRONT UR THX 80 Hz BUTTON WILL SIDEUR 80 Hz SUBWOOFER THX 80 Hz SPEAKER THXULTRA2 SUB OFF CONFIGURATION These parameters cannot be adju
275. plicate bass frequencies to the SUB output The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Selecting the FULL SUB option can result in excessive bass When the speaker setup does not include side speakers select NONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L R output connectors If the REAR L R parameter is also set to NONE the RV 8 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L R output connectors Note When the SIDE L R parameter is set to NONE Dolby Digital Surround EX THX Ultra2 THX Surround EX DTS ES decoding the ASA parameter and PLIIx modes are not available EX gt REISS gt When THX speaker setup is selected a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the SIDE L R output connectors and the SIDE L R parameter cannot be adjusted REAR L R FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE Ear gt REGS gt gt gt Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled REAR L R when a custom speaker setup is selected Select FULL to send a full range signal to the rear speakers Otherwise select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the rear speakers Select FULL SUB to send a full range signal to the rear speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass Sele
276. ponse 50Hz to 16kHz 40 1dB 1 0dB THD Noise 0 496 at 1 kHz stereo Signal to Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmV Image Rejection gt 50dB 260GB typical AM Suppression gt 45dB gt 55cB typical AM Tuner Performance Compatibility NTSC PAL and SECAM Switching Active Output Level 1 0V peak to peak Impedance 750 Input Return Loss gt 40dB Differential Gain lt 0 5 Differential Phase 0 5 Bandwidth 225MHz K Factor 0 396 Gain 30 15dB Signal to Noise Ratio gt 65dB Frequency Response 10Hz to 10M Hz 0 1 0 3dB Tuning Range 520 to 1720kHz Usable Sensitivity 8uV 4uV typical THD Noise 0 5696 0 20 typical 1kHz 60dBmV 30 mod Wideband AGC 280dBmV Component Video Performance Phono Performa nce MM Frequency Response 50Hz to 20kHz 0 5dB 0 5dB rumble filter 4dB at 10Hz THD Noise 0 2096 20Hz to 10kHz 4 7mV input Signal to Noise Ratio 72dB minimum Compatibility 3 Channel Y Pr Pb format independent Switching Passive Impedance 750 Insertion Loss lt Bandwidth gt 150M Hz Video Converter NTSC PAL SECAM to Y Pb Pr Compatible Amplifier Connectors Banana Plugs Standard 0 75 inch plugs Microphone Input Connectors Spade Connectors Size 10 12 gauge Inputs Two microphone jacks Input Sensitiv
277. previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed When no menus are open this button performs no function Navigates to the left in the RT 10 or RT 20 menu structure 34 When a menu is open closes the menu structure When no menus are open shows the two line status Selects the highlighted RT 10 or RT 20 menu item 35 Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save load presets when the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input Direct RT 10 or RT 20 title chapter group or track number selection 36 37 If the RV 8 built in tuner is the currently selected input toggles between AM FM frequency bands If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input saves the currently selected tuner frequency as a preset Also used to program the remote See page C 4 for additional information Enters values 10 and above on the RT 10 or RT 20 Press once for numbers in the teens twice for numbers in the twenties and so on Then press a number button 0 to 9 to enter a second digit Deletes entries when RT 10 or RT 20 search modes and certain playback modes are activated 38 Macro Buttons M 1 is for Macro 1 M2 is for Macro 2 and is for Macro 3 See page C 9 for additional information on how to use and program macros 39 Activates the remote control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easier visibility
278. r lt 1 6 47 Programming Macro Buttons C 10 Three digit Preprogrammed Codes C 18 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Tro bl sHooting atti ERI A 7 2 Appendix D Routine Maintenance 7 4 Installation Worksheet nnns D 2 1 Getting Started About the RV 8 Pavo po PUER V HERREN E e ERE ERES ONE EUER 1 2 Highlights eese eee eed err q a We NS EXER 1 4 Product Registration a a 1 5 Installation Considerations 1 5 Remote Control Battery Installation 1 6 Getting Started Lexicon ABOUT THE RV 8 Thank you for purchasing the RV 8 Receiver an 8 channel audio and video control center with independent zone monitoring that provides control of audio and video source selection in three zones at the same time The RV 8 includes eight configurable inputs each of which can be assigned to its built in tuner eight digital audio eight analog audio phono five composite video five S Video or three component video input connectors The analog connectors can be configured for up to two 5 1 channel sources The RV 8 features an integrated 7 channel power amplifier that i
279. r at a time until the right code number is found the number that tums off the device If the device turns off when the three digit code is entered make note of the code It will have at least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the device Confirm that it isthe right code by pressing the Power button The device should turn on After it is confirmed that the right code is entered save the code by pressing the SAVE button on the LCD At this point try ALL of the buttons on the remote and see which ones work with the device The majority of the buttons should C 5 Appendix Lexicon 10 11 12 work with the device Make note of the code if it seems to be the right one and try the next one You are trying to find the one that hasthe most functions to operate your equipment If there are any functions missing you will leam them from your original remote in the Using Learning Method section on page C 7 Continue to program other components by repeating from Step 1 above Press EXIT at any time to stop the procedure When you are finished programming the remote exit from the preprogramming mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again Note A programmed code for each device can be changed at any time by using the preprogrammed method which starts on the previous page A new code will override an old code For example this woul
280. r speakers It is recom mended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space SURROUND EX AUTO ON OFF Controlsthe THX Surround EX decoding feature which can be used to extract a rear channel from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When ON is selected THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When OFF is selected THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources Available in THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX and THX modes to 15ms 6 45 Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued When AUTO is selected THX Surround EX decoding is engaged SURROUND MIX 5 to 5dB when a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with THX Sur round EX encoding is detected THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAM ETER DESCRIPTION S continued not engaged when a non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected Note The RV 8 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources A non flagged input source does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX Surround EX encoding THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dol
281. rb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 5 Oto 18 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 20m 4to 30m MID RT 1 56s 24ms to 24 3s BASS RT 1 875 5msto 48 65 PRE DELAY 24ms OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 2 4kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 3dB 12 to 46dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 BASS RT MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions CATHEDRAL The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode It uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich smooth reverberant decay characteristic of large listening spaces such as cathedrals with long reverberation time relative to their size The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from Lexicon professional products Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings CENTER DEPTH 12 01018 SPEECH DETECT ON ON OFF SIZE 30m 4 to 30m MID RT 3 72s 24ms to 24 3s BASS RT 4 47s 5ms to 48 6s PRE DELAY 23ms OFF 1 to 100ms ROLLOFF 3 1kHz 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF EFFECT LVL 8dB 12 to OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 3
282. rces DTS ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5 1 channel matrix encoded or a 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is detected DTS ES decoding is deactivated when a 5 1 channel DTS source is detected DTS ES listening modes are available when DTS ES decoding is engaged DTS listening modes are available when DTS ES decoding is not engaged Refer to the DTS ES Decoding section that begins on page 5 25 for more information Note the following DTS ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present e The DTS ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5 1 channel DTS source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and 5 1 channel matrix encoded or 6 1 channel discrete encoded DTS ES source is present This parameter is available in all DTS modes EX DECODING AUTO ON OFF Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding which extracts a rear channel from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX When ON Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources When OFF Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disen gaged for all 5 1 channe Dolby Digital sources When AUTO is selected Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged when a flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected Do
283. rd and downward through the complete list of available settings The current setting is displayed beneath the parameter name in the on screen and front panel displays 2 When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter name press the arrow to accept the setting and close the drop down menu HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph The bar graph indicatesthe position at which the current parameter setting falls within the entire parameter range For example selecting the A V SYNC DELAY parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opensthe horizontal bar graph shown below which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY OFF 1 to 60ms AIV SYNC DELAY OFF CUSTOM NAME OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph 1 When the horizontal bar graph appears press the remote control a and arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the desig nated increments The setting appears to the right of the parameter name in the on screen and front panel displays 2 When the desired adjustments have been made press the 4 arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph Note Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus These instances are noted throughout this user guide 2 16 RV 8 Basic Operation 5 a c A 4 2 o
284. resent in the input source the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the speaker setup The table at the top of the next page indicates the conditions in which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are activated 6 30 RV 8 Mode Adjust Input Source Parameter Setting 5 1 Channel Analog 5 1 Channel THX Surround EX 5 1 THX Surround EX Analog Flagged Analog Non Flagged SURROUND EX ON SURROUND EX OFF 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX ULTRA2 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX ULTRA2 5 1a THX SurEX 5 1a THX ULTRA2 The 5 1a THX UL2Cin listening mode The 5 1a THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active THX Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX param eter is set to OFF When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated Adaptive de correlation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space De correlation of the mono sur round channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in home theaters ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3 35 for more information The 5 1a THX SurEX listening mode The 5 1a THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is active THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON
285. rrent level is higher 80 TO 12dB 3 69 Setup Lexicon TRIGGER SETUP Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right which can be used to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 The RV 8 rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors The connector labeled PWR the power trigger output connector is not configurable It is activated when the RV 8 is activated and deactivated when the RV 8 is deactivated The trigger output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or program operation Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings REMOTE ONLY ON ON OFF Program Operation OFF ON OFF REMOTE ONLY ON OFF gt Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote operation When set to ON this connector is configured for remote operation The remote control play and stop buttons turns the trigger on and off The RV 8 ignores all other TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings When set to OFF the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured for remote operation It can be configured for program operation MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP SETUP INPUTS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT REMOTE ONLY DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV TUNER PHONO ZONE2 INPUTS ZONE3 INPUTS t FIL
286. s 00000 0 11111 19 History dependent Toggles between muting Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level Toggles between fully muting Zone 2 volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume level to its original level 20 History dependent Scrolls upward through listening modes Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone FADER parameter towards the front 21 22 History dependent History dependent Scrolls downward through listening modes Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone FADER parameter towards the back If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input press M4 to skip back to next available preset 23 History dependent Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1 24 History dependent If the RV 8 s but in tuner is the currently selected input press to skip forward to next available preset c 5 4 2 9 9 O Ga a 800000 History dependent buttons perform different functions depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device 2 22 RV 8 Basic Operation e ax e L2 17 Decreases Zone volume level in 1dB increments Decreases Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments 18 Activates the 5 1 THX 5 1 THX Ultra2 or
287. s designed to achieve high levels of power and performance Equipped with a toroidal power transformer the amplifier also provides thermal and DC protection The RV 8 AM FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions allows for the automatic or manual storing of up to 40 preset stations can receive elements of the Radio Data System RDS broadcasts and is fully configurable for ease of operation The RV 8 also includes a phono input Inside and out the RV 8 is designed for possible future develop ments The rear panel houses one RS 232 connector capable of performing configuration downloads and flash memory software upgrades and another capable of supporting future developments The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accom modate connectors for emerging technologies More than just an audio and video control center the RV 8 features the latest version of Lexicon s critically acclaimed Logic 79 decoding which creates 7 1 channel output from stereo and 5 1 6 1 channel sources Unlike other decoders Logic 7 is compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible Logic 7 decoding is widely regarded as the finest available A Logic 7 encoded downmix of multichannel source material is available when using the Headphone listening mode If a stereo source is present the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it using LOGIC7 then uses Head
288. s operating session In the event of a power outage the RV 8 will display a BROWN OUT PRESS STANDBY message To turn the unit on use the STANDBY button For more information see POWER MANAGEMENT on page 3 3 9 CHANNEL STATUS LEDs Each amplifier channel has a blue LED on the front panel that is illuminated when the unit is powered on If there is a problem with an amplifier channel the corresponding LED will turn off See Amplifier Overview on page 2 13 for additional information 10 MODE and BUTTONS Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous or next available listening mode Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the MODE ADJUST menu Refer to Listening Mode Activation on page 6 2 for more information RV 8 Basic Operation 11 MUTE BUTTON Mutes or restoresthe RV 8 Main Zone volume to its original level Press the Mute button to mute volume level MUTE ON appears in the on screen and front panel displays Press the Mute button again to restore the volume to its original level The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP and MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels Mute may be activated automatically or manually For example the RV 8 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or listening modes The amber Mute button LED lights whenever mute is activated 12 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON Deactivates the M ain Zone 13 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON Deactivates Zone 2 14 ZONE 3 OFF BUTTON
289. s the HOME button to exit to main Punch Through mode Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode ERASING MACRO FUNCTIONS To erase M1 M2 M3 Power System Off buttons 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen Press the MACRO button To erase all of the macro buttons in the RV 8 remote press the ALL button and then press the SURE button at the next LCD screen 5 To erase just one of the macros press the KEY button at step 4 and then one of the M 1 M2 POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons to erase the macro functions from that button Pressthe HOME button to exit to main Erase mode 7 Pressthe HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode C 12 RV 8 Appendix C ERASING FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS To erase favorite channel buttons 1 Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen Press the FAV button To erase all the favorite channel buttons in the RV 8 remote press the ALL button and then press the SURE button at the next LCD Screen 5 To erase one button press the KEY button Press the individual button you want to erase and continue with any other individual buttons you want to erase Repeat from Step 5 to erase any favorite channel buttons Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode
290. s the Main Zone command bank which input for the listening mode inputforZone2 Volume level to includes commands that Main Zone family 15dB control Zone 3 Displays the DVD1 Selects the Toggles between Selects the DVD1 Shows status menu command bank which DVD1 input for the current input for Zone 2 forcurrent Main Zone includes commands that the Main Zone listening mode input stream control DVD1 and the 2 CHANNEL STAT2 button see listening mode page 2 29 for more information Displays the DVD2 Selects the Analog Bypass Selects the DVD1 Activates the RV 8 command bank which DVD2 input for Toggle input for Zone 2 includes commands that the Main Zone control DVD2 Displays the SAT Selects the SAT SelectstheL7 FILM Selects the Reserved for future command bank which input for the listening mode Satellite input for expansion includes commands that Main Zone Zone 2 control the Satellite box 2 18 RV 8 Basic Operation Enters RV 8 standby mode Reserved for future expansion Activates the RV 8 Toggles RT 10 or RT 20 power Displays the Status of Resets the AUDIO Opens and closes the RT 10 or RT 20 disc tray Zone 3 CONTROLS menu BASS TREBLE and TILT EQ parameter to 40 0dB Deactivates Zone 3 Decreases the AUDIO Opens RT 10 or Opens and closes the CONTROLS menu Main RT 20 Top menu RT 10 or RT 20 Video Zo
291. signed to the stereo connectors labeled 3 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5 1 channel connector labeled 5 1 ANLG 3 5 Two channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5 1 channel connector labeled 5 1 ANLG 6 8 The 5 1 channel connectors should only be used with 5 1 channel analog sources such as DVD As and SACDs The 5 1 channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the Main Zone analog audio output connectors as shown in the table below Input Connector Output Connector L Front L R Front R C Center SUB Sub LS Side L and Rear L RS Side R and Rear R 3 61 Setup Lexicon I O CONFIG continued SETUP 1 0 CONFIG AMP OUTPUTS INPUTS ANALOG INPUTS MAIN 7 1 SPEAKERS AMP OUTPUTS MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE2 2 0 1 0 CONFIG MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE3 2 0 DISPLAYS MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT MAIN 7 1 Ei gt GS gt EI v When set to MAIN 7 1 all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panel will be configured for use in the Main Zone Outputs 3 and 7 are used for the rear speakers Rear L R MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE2 2 0 Eg gt Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2 Outputs 1 2 4 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone The input source selected for Zone 2 will be outp
292. sing power These 1 2 RV 8 Getting Started powerful processors perform custom Lexicon processing such as Logic 7 decoding bass enhancement dialogue enhancement auto azimuth five speaker enhancement bass management high precision digital crossovers and audio controls These features are available at sample rates of up to 96kHz with 24 bit resolution to retain top performance from all sources In addition a third DSP engine is dedicated to decoding multichannel compressed audio sources The RV 8 is one of the most advanced audio and video control centers available High precision 24 bit 96kHz A D converters can be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital signals allowing the RV 8 to provide the benefits of precise digital signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity 24 bit 192kHZ D A converters are available for all output channels Alternatively 5 1 channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A D conversion and internal processing following a pure signal path directly to the output connectors Digital audio input signals are processed through a two stage phase lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection Lexicon s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and level imbalances in stereo sources ensuring exceptionally accurate playback of surround encoded sources A digital audio pass through output is available for recording digital signals with a CD recor
293. speakers to the left and right sides of the primary listening position ACADEM Y FILTER ON OFF When set to ON restores the proper tonal balance of older mono film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than more recent mono film sources AUTO AZIMUTH ON OFF Maximizes matrix steering accuracy When set to ON the RV 8 continually monitors the 2 channel input signal and automatically adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with maximum separation When set to OFF the accuracy of the selected listening mode varies among sources It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF for music sources BASS CONTENT BINAURAL MONO STEREO Adjusts the bass content of binaural mono and stereo recordings When set to BINAURL the RV 8 activates low frequency compen sation Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with dummy head microphones Select the MONO setting for sources recorded with mono bass Select the STEREO setting for sources recorded with stereo bass BASS ENHANCE Enhances stereo bass which results in low frequency reproduction that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space The effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies depending on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to reproduce low frequencies It is recommended that y
294. sted When a THX speaker setup is selected the RV 8 applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a 12dB per octave filter to the Front L R Center Side L R and Rear L R output connectors The RV 8 applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a 24dB per octave filter to the Subwoofer output connector Notes A THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX listening modes n the THX SETUP menu only the REAR L R THX ULTRA2 SUB BGC and ASA parameters can be changed RV 8 Setup SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS EU gt Eu gt Seay gt or The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for config uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP and THX SETUP menus EX v EIS SEE MES Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of the selected speaker setup When a parameter setting is adjusted on one menu the corresponding parameter setting is automatically adjusted on the other menu For example when a THX speaker setup is selected the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are set to THX 80Hz CUSTOM SETUP Menu THX SETUP Menu Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings Default Setting Possible Settings FRONT L R 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz CENTER 80Hz FULL FULL SUB 30 to 120Hz THX 80Hz NONE THX 80Hz THX 80
295. sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted with the proper polarity page 1 6 Replace the remote control batteries When the batteries are low on power the remote control enters a low voltage condition that prevents it from operating the RV 8 The RV 8 is powered on but there is no audio E Make sure volume level is audible Volume level can be increased with the front panel volume knob or the remote control VOL gt and buttons Make sure audio has not been muted The message MUTE ON or FULL MUTE ON will appear in the on screen and front panel displays when audio has been muted To deactivate mute press the Mute button or adjust the volume level Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned to the selected input Make sure the RV 8 is receiving an audio signal To do this follow the instructions that begin on page 2 29 to open the STATUS menu for the current input source Dialogue sounds muffled If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker make sure a custom as opposed to a THX speaker setup is selected Then make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to NONE page 3 31 A humming sound is present in the audio 1 If a cable TV connection is present disconnect the cable from the wall outlet If this eliminates the humming sound a ground loop isolation device is required Contact your dealer
296. t generates uses and radiates radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on The user is encour aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Recorient or relocate the receiving antenna increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is con nected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio televi sion technician for help This triangle which appears on your component alerts you to important operating and maintenance instructions in this accompanying literature exicon Harman International Company Lexicon Inc 3 Oak Park Bedford MA 01730 1413 USA Tel 781 280 0300 Fax 781 280 0490 www harmanspecialtygroup com Customer Service Telephone 781 280 0300 Sales Fax 781 280 0495 Service Fax 781 280 0499 Part No 070 15838 Rev1 01 06 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems Inc U S Pat No s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 and other U S and world wide patents issued and pending DT
297. t be present in the input source RV 8 Introduction Table of Contents Documentation Conventions eee ii Getting Started About the RV 8 tas A A aede Re 1 2 Highlights aha 1 4 Product Registration sss 1 5 Installation 0 50 1 5 Remote Control Battery amp 1 6 Basic Operation Front Panel Overview 2 2 Rear Panel 2 6 Tuner OVerview 5 decreti dict e AQ 2 10 Selecting a Station 2 2 10 Direct Station Access 2 10 Tune Seek Access i netter aedis decal 2 10 Sean Mode uu idee e ena 2 11 Loading Presets ttt D i eating aa 2 11 Saving Presets 2 11 Naming PresefS d ttr rtr dans 2 11 Editing Presets eter e treten dne 2 12 Autoload Co ae 2 12 Amplifier 2 13 Amplifier Channel Status 2 2 13 Making Connections With the Amplifier Output 2 13 Headphone Overview 0 0 2 14 Remote Control Overview 0 2 14 Operation 2 14 MAIN M
298. t is recom mended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources as many films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization Available in L7 FILM L7 TV Dolby PUI THX Dolby PLIIx THX 5 1 L7 FILM 5 1 L7 TV THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX DTS ES L7 FILM DTS ES THX ULTRA2 and DTS ES THX modes REAR DLY OFFSET OFF 1 to 30ms Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the arrival time of rear speaker signals It is recommended that you increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA mode 6 43 Adjust Lexicon LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS continued REAR L R 30 to 12dB OFF Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Rear L R Available in all except 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 2 CHANNEL 5 1 MONO DTS ES 2 CHAN 2CH BYPASS and LIVE modes RESET MODE Restores the factory default version of the selected listening mode restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default settings Available in all modes REVERB LVL 80 to 0dB OFF Controls the amount of added reverb Available in all LIVE modes ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20 0kHz OFF Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real sp
299. t lower volume levels Available in all Logic 7 modes 6 46 RV 8 Mode Adjust MODE PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used The parameter Is used in these modes 5 SPKR ENHANCE All L7 modes ACADEM Y FILTER MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC AUTO AZIMUTH L7 FILM and L7 TV BASS CONTENT PANORAMA BASS ENHANCE All L7 modes BASS CHURCH CATHEDRAL and all LIVE modes CALIBRATION PANORAMA CENTER All except 2 CH modes 2 CHANNEL 2 CH BYPASS DTS ES 2 CHAN 5 1 2 CHANNEL MONO 5 1 MONO and LIVE modes CENTER DEPTH NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL CENTER MIX 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN CNTR DLY SAM PLES 5 1 2 CHANNEL DTS ES 2 CHAN COMPRESSION All Dolby Digital modes CTR WIDTH Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC CUSTOM All modes CUSTOM VS PRESET All modes DIMENSION Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby MUSIC EARLY RFLX LVL All LIVE modes EFFECT LVL NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA MONO LOGIC and 5 1 MONO LOGIC ES DECODING All DTS modes 6 47 Adjust Lexicon MODE PARAM ETER RELATIONSHIPS continued The parameter Is used in these modes EX DECODING 5 1 PLIIx M OV 5 1 MUS DOLBY DIGITAL and DOLBY DIGITAL FRONT STEERING L7 TV L7 MUSIC L7 MUSIC SURR all 5 1 L7 modes and all
300. te control or front panel Mode button The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below Dynamic modes 2 Channel Dolby PLIIx THX Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX DTS DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THX Dolby PLIIx MOV THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCR DTS NEO 6 MUSIC Dolby PLIIx MUS THX MUSIC DTS THX MUSIC DTS NEO 6 THX 5 1 PLIIx MOV DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILM DTS NEO 6 CIN 5 1 PLIIx MUS DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSIC DTS 2 CHAN or DTS ES 2 CHAN Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu The RV 8 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes for each input and incoming audio format However not all listening modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu Listening modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes under any circumstances are listed in the table below Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu 2 Channel Dolby Digital DTS Dolby PLIIx THX THX MUSIC DIS THX MUSIC Dolby PLIIx MOV 5 1 MOV 5 1 MONO LOGIC Dolby PLIIx MUS 5 1 PLIIx MUS 5 1 MONO SURR DTS NEO 6 THX 5 1 MONO DTS NEO 6 CIN DTS NEO 6 MUSIC 3 13 Setup Lexicon SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES continued The Use Last Parameter When the RV 8 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selected input selecting another mod
301. ters long The available characters are letters A to Z numbers to 9 and 10 additional symbols or a blank space CLEAR PRESET Clears the current preset entry The front panel and on screen display will display PRESS MENU TO CLEAR PRESET Press the menu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset 6 Mode Adjust Mode ACUUSE 6 2 Listening Mode 6 2 Listening Mode Descriptions eese 6 4 Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions 6 39 Mode Parameter Relationships 6 47 Adjust Lexicon MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP These listening mode names differ depend ing on the current input source speaker setup and parameter settings Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions for more information MODE ADJUST 1 FILM si ti MUSIC MUSIC SURR KI PLIIx THX KI PUIx oH KI PLIIx MUS KI PLII THX KI PLII MOVIE TI PUI MUSIC II PL THX KI PRO LOGIC THX tee ass MUSIC NIGHTCLUB CONCERT HHALL CHURCH CATHEDRAL PANORAMA 2 CH SURROUND 2 CHANNEL MONO LOGIC MONO SURROUND MONO 5 1 FILM 5 1 TV 5 1 MUSIC IHx z MUSIC 5 1 PLIIx MOV 5 1 PLIIx MUS DIGITAL
302. th the following exceptions HEADPHONE L7 HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5 1a These listening modes are described in detail on page 6 34 Listening mode activation occurs through the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters page 3 12 the front panel or remote control Mode button page 2 17 the remote control listening mode family selection buttons page 2 17 RV 8 Mode Adjust PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening mode selection parameters labeled 2 CH DOLBY D DTS ES 5 1a and MIC These parameters are used to select a preferred listening mode for 2 channel Dolby Digital DTS ES 5 1a and LIVE input sources The RV 8 automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present MODE AND BUTTONS The front panel and remote control Mode arrow buttons can be used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input source Pressing these buttons scrolls up 4 or down through listening modes available for the current Main Zone source Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODE ADJUST menu For example if a 2 channel input source is present press 4 arrow buttons to scroll through available 2 channel listening modes The selected listening mode appears in the bottom left corner of the Main Zone two line status
303. the LCD 9 Confirm that the right code number that matches the component was entered by pressing other functional buttons If any of the buttons do not operate as they should repeat from step 1 10 Continue to program other components by repeating from step 1 previous page 11 Press EXIT at any time if you do not wish to proceed 12 Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOM E button once again USING LEARNING METHOD The RV 8 remote can be programmed to operate a device by teaching the correct commands to the device buttons on the main screen menu to the two sub pages within each device button to the 31 buttons and the joystick located in the middle of the remote control The RV 8 remote leams these commands by receiving infrared signals directly from your existing remote controls The RV 8 remote receives these signals through its learning eye located at the top of the unit Apart from the PAGE HOME and FAV buttons which cannot be taught the RV 8 remote has the capability of leaming up to 530 commands Note Function buttons are buttons that can be assigned a command to control a particular action for a device Commonly used function buttons include the 2 pages of sub commands within each of the 10 devices channel up down volume up down menu guide exit info digits 0 9 and the center of the joystick thumbpad CAUTION Do not edit the Main
304. the LCD contrast C 16 advanced speaker array 3 35 amplifier channel status 2 13 amplifier output connectors 2 13 amplifier outputs 2 7 amplifier overview 2 13 analog audio input connectors 2 7 ANALOG BYPASS parameter 3 18 ANALOG IN parameter 3 7 3 8 D 2 anamorphic trigger signals 3 18 ANLG IN LVL parameter 3 7 3 9 3 23 ANLOG BYPASS parameter 3 17 arrow buttons 2 15 ASA parameter 3 29 3 35 assigning input connectors 3 7 audio controls BALANCE parameter 4 6 BASS parameter 4 2 CLEAR PRESET parameter 5 3 FADER parameter 4 6 LISTEN TO PRESET parameter 5 3 LOUDNESS parameter 4 4 NAME parameter 5 3 TILT EQ parameter 4 4 TREBLE parameter 4 2 ZONE2 BALANCE parameter 4 6 AUDIO CONTROLS menu 4 2 D 4 audio output connectors 2 8 2 9 Index AUTO 6 4 AUTO AZIMUTH parameter 6 4 6 39 AUTO FREQUENCY parameter 3 78 AUTO GAIN parameter 3 9 3 10 AUTO parameter 3 9 3 10 AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens 3 48 Autoload 2 12 AUTOLOAD parameter 3 74 Automatic Calibration 3 36 Automatic calibration using microphones 3 37 B BACKGROUND parameter 3 20 D 4 BALANCE parameter 4 2 D 4 BASS CONTENT parameter 6 13 6 39 BASS ENHANCE parameter 6 4 6 5 6 16 6 17 6 26 6 29 6 30 6 39 BASS parameter 4 2 D 4 frequency response graph 4 3 BASS PEAK LIMITERS 3 53 BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu 3 58 D 3 BASS RT parameter 6 12 6 39 BASS XOVER parameter 6 39 battery installation 1 6 battery life C
305. the THX SurEX listening mode when a 5 1 channel THX source is present Activates Dolby PLIIx THX when a stereo source is present Toggles between fully muting the RV 8 Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level 19 Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level Toggles between muting the RV 8 Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level 20 Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments Scrolls upward through RV 8 listening modes 21 Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments Scrolls downward through RV 8 listening modes 22 If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input press M4 to skip back to the next available preset Skipsto the beginning of the current chapter or track Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of the previous chapter or track 23 Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1 Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular playback speed 24 If the RV 8 s built in tuner is the currently selected input press to skip forward to the next available preset Skipsto the beginning of the next chapter or track Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of the next chapter or track 2 23 Basic Operation Lexicon amp w e es 25 History dependent
306. the frequency response of each crossover point SPEAKER SETUP MAIN MENU gt SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS 1 0 CONFIG DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGES AUTOMATIC MANUAL TUNER PRESETS SETUP TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER M ANAGEM ENT To configure a custom speaker setup Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the associated speakers For example set the FRONT L R parameter to the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the front speakers Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest crossover point of any of the other speakers For example if CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above set the SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz the lowest crossover point of the other speakers CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP CENTER SIDE L R REAR L R SUBWOOFER SET CROSSOVERS THXULTRA2 SUB BEFORE CALIBRATING ASA In a custom setup low frequencies are generally redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points Signals lower than the lowest crossover point are redirected to the subwoofer If the lowest crossover point is FULL low frequency signals excluding LFE information are not redirected to the subwoofer Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the other speaker chann
307. the microphone check The following screens appears in the on screen display as the micro phone check is performed CHECKING FOR SILENCE Appears in the on screen display while the RV 8 determines the relative noise level of the listening space and the internal noise level of the microphones After eliminating microphones that are not detected or not functioning the RV 8 calculates an average level for all microphones CHECK MICROPHONES CHECKING FOR SILENCE PLEASE WAIT 3 40 RV 8 Setup CHECKING MICROPHONES Appears in the on screen display while the RV 8 confirms the microphone level calculated during the silence check To do this the RV 8 sends alternating calibration noise signals to the front left and right speakers These signals are output between 55dB and 95dB beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments until the microphones detect the required level If the signal becomes too loud press the arrow button to cancel the microphone check CHECK MICROPHONES CHECKING MICROPHONES PLEASE WAIT The RV 8 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate micro phones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too high Then the RV 8 determines the appropriate output level for the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration CHECK MICROPHONES Results Appears in the on screen display when the RV 8 is finished checking the microphones This display indicates the individ
308. then 2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF Note Speaker crossover settings speaker distances and audio controls tone are not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated HEADPHONE L7 HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of 2 channel sources through headphones This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2 channel sources when listening through headphones No parameters for the HEADPHONE listening mode are available HEADPHONE 5 1 HEADPHONE 5 1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of Dolby Digital encoded music or film sources through headphones This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones The HEADPHONE 5 1 listening mode is recommended for Dolby Digital encoded sources when listening through headphones No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5 1 listening mode are available 6 34 RV 8 M ode Adjust HEADPHONE DTS HEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of DTS ES encoded music or film sources through headphones This listeni
309. ther than product defects including lack of skill competence or experience on the part of the owner Damage occurring during any shipment of this product Claims for shipping damages must be made with the carrier Damage to a unit that has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced modi fied or removed exicon H A Harman International Company What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group Assume Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material expenses for covered items Payment of shipping charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty How is Service Obtained When this product needs service write telephone or fax Harman Specialty Group to request information about where the unit should be taken or sent When making a written request please include your name complete address and daytime telephone number the product model and serial numbers and a descrip tion of the problem Do not return the unit to Harman Specialty Group without prior authorization When Shipping a Product for Service 1 Pay any initial shipping charges which are the responsibility of the owner If necessary repairs are covered by this warranty Harman Specialty Group will pay return shipping charges to any destination in the United States using the carrier of our choice Pack the unit securely Package insurance is strongly recommended Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt A copy of the
310. this connector Otherwise the RV 8 activates a crossover point at the selected setting Choose the setting equal to the lowest setting of the other speakers FULL 30 TO 120 Hz THX 80Hz NONE CROSSOVER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L R THX SETUP CENTER SUBWOOFER FULL 30Hz 40Hz 50 2 60 2 70Hz CUSTOM SETUP SIDE UR REAR L R SUBWOOFER THXULTRA2 SUB 80Hz THX 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz NONE ASA Note When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE subwoofer signals will not be redirected if the 5 1a BYPASS listening mode is activated To redirect subwoofer signals configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD A SACD player SETUP 3 33 Setu p Lexicon SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS continued MAIN MENU SETUP SPEAKER SETUP CROSSOVER SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS CHECK MICROPHONES THX SETUP TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG AUTOMATIC SETUP DISPLAYS MANUAL VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER SET CROSSOVERS TUNER SETUP BEFORE CALIBRATING LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT THX SPEAKER SETUP THX SETUP ON PERENE CUSTOM SETUP ICAUTION FRONT THX 80Hz OFF i FRONT UR PRESSINGTHE gt CENTER THX 80Hz i CENTER BUTTON WILL SIDE THX 80Hz APART I SIDE LR AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE REARUR THX 80Hz CLOSE REAR L R THE OUTPUTS TO A THX SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz TOGETHER i SUBWOOFER SPEAKER CONFIGURATION THXULTRA2 SUB r THXULTRA2 S
311. three times will create a pause of 0 6 seconds between the commands where the delay was inserted Pressing PAUSE does not count as a macro step When using a macro remember to keep the remote pointed toward the components until the macro is finished being transmited A Sending icon will flash in the upper right comer of the LCD screen as the macro is sending each command It will not appear when a series of PAUSE commands are being executed Wait until the icon finishes flashing before using other functions or putting down the remote SAM PLE M ACRO SEQUENCE The following is a sample macro which demonstrates what a macro can accomplish This example assumes the names of the devices have not been changed and that the punch through technique was used to assign the VOL to the RV 8 If the labels have been changed insert the changed names into the example In this example the M 1 button will be used to power on the TV the RV 8 and the cable box choose the appropriate inputs and tune in a favorite TV channel O WN Q N O 14 15 16 17 18 19 Press HOME and ENT simultaneously for three seconds Press MACRO Press M 1 Press MAIN Opens the remote control MAIN device page Press POWER Press TV Opens the TV device page Press POWER Press HOME Press SAT Opens the SAT device page Press POWER Press HOME Press MAIN Press PAUSE three times Pressing
312. tion When THX Surround EX decoding is active Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital sources Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF SURROUND EX AUTO AUTO ON OFF COM PRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 0 0dB 10 0 to 0 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Note The THX UL2Cin listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources Activate this listening mode with the front panel or remote control Mode buttons When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automat ically activate a THX UL2Cin listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present THX MUSIC gt This listening mode is designed for playback of 5 1 channel Dolby Digital music sources and cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are present ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers See ASA on page 3 35 for more information For best results place the rear speakers close together in your home theater Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS _ Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37
313. tivate the dynamic 5 1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present Note The 5 1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings EX DECODING AUTO AUTO ON OFF COMPRESSION OFF AUTO ON OFF LFE MIX 40 0dB 10 0 to 40 0dB OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening M ode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions RV 8 Mode Adjust 5 1 PLIIx MUS The 5 1 MUS MUSIC listening mode is designed to playback 7 1 discrete channels decoded from 5 1 channel Dolby Digital music Sources The seven main channels are full frequency The 1 channel often referred to as LFE information has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz Note The RV 8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non flagged 5 1 channel Dolby Digital input sources Activating the 5 1 PLIIx MUS listening mode The 5 1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital Sources To activate this listening mode use the front panel or remote control Mode buttons When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST the RV 8 will automatically activate the dynamic 5 1 PLIIx MUS listeni
314. to Edit Text on Function Device Buttons on page 13 for more information C 2 RV 8 Appendix C MACRO OPERATIONS A macro is a series of commands that can be sent out with the push of a single button Any function available on an original remote control or in the preprogrammed database can be added to a macro to completely automate what would normally be done by pushing buttons one at a time A macro can be configured to power on a TV or projector RV 8 and RT 10 Disc Player change to the appropriate inputs and outputs dim lights and start a movie It can be as simple or as comprehensive as desired There are two types of buttons that can be used for macro operations M 1 M2 M3 POWER and SYSTEM OFF Buttons as well asthe programmable device buttons The M1 M2 and M3 are called system wide buttons because they send out the same signal no matter what device is currently controlled The POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons can be made system wide if they are programmed with macros Note Programming the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons with a macro overrides the preprogrammed or learned code on the button See page C 10 for further information Each of these five buttons is designed to be able to send out a series of up to 20 commandsthat are programmed into the buttons One common use is to turn on and turn off all A V components with one button press Device buttons can be programmed with any macro sequence desired The rem
315. to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds 2 Pressthe PUNCH button next to the LCD screen Note When using Punch Through think of the first device selected as the device that now controls the functions and think of the second device as the device you want to control those functions You are taking the controls of the second device and punching them through to the first device 3 Pressthe VOL button on the LCD for Volume Punch Through the PLAY button for Transport Punch Through and the CH button for Channel Punch Through 4 Select the device you wish to punch through to first device example television or satellite receiver 5 Select the device you wish to punch through from second device example RV 8 MAIN You are punching through the controls of the second device to the device that is currently being controlled by any other buttons For example for VOL you are punching through the controls of the RV 8 MAIN VOL to the TV or SAT enabling you to control the RV 8 MAIN VOL when in the TV or SAT screen Punch Through is saved when the second device is pressed Repeat from step 2 to program Punch Through for other devices Once you complete the programming and wish to exit fromthis mode press the HOME button Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again 9 Repeat from step 5 to punch through any other devices or learned buttons 10 Pres
316. together You may have one or more components that do not have original remote controls These can still be controlled by the RV 8 The preprogrammed method must be used for those devices For the rest you can program the RV 8 to make it compatible with all components by following the preprogrammed method instructions by using the original remote controls to teach the RV 8 or through both methods Next it is recommended that you decide whether a device based or an activity based configuration is desired A device based configuration centers on each device with its two LCD pages controlling one component All of the functions that the original remote control has programmed in it would be put onto one device The RV 8 remote comes with the labels and preprogrammed codes in a device based setup When a preprogrammed code is chosen for a component from the Three Digit Preprogrammed Codes tables which start on page C 18 that code will be applied to one device only An activity based configuration centers on what you are doing at the time If you are watching a DVD on your TV and are using the RV 8 to control the sound you may want to start by setting up the DVD device using the preprogrammed method described in the next column and then add functions from the other devices you will be using while watching your DVD video to the DVD device For example while playing a DVD to adjust the volume of the RV 8 use the Punch Through
317. tton followed by the 5 button to save as preset number 15 Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset number to the third digit entered Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process NAMING PRESETS Preset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system In the US each preset channel is identified by the station s call letters or what the broadcast information identifies as the call letters In Europe and Japan each preset channel is identified by the station s Program Service PS name If the RDS information is not available the preset name defaults to PresetXX where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu Basic Operation Lexicon For example if Preset 01 is FM 90 90 and the call letters are WABC then the name for that position is WABC If Preset 23 does not broadcast their call letters then that location is identified as Preset23 in the menu EDITING PRESETS It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV 8 To edit the preset name 1 Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU The TUNER PRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages PAGE 1 contains presets 1 through 10 PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20 etc 2 Select the page containing the desired preset A list of presets appears 3 Select the desired preset The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displaysthe preset call letters or PS frequency and band The EDIT PRESET menu options are as foll
318. ual check results for each microphone An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the microphone check An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass the microphone check CHECK MICROPHONES MICROPHONE MIC1 OK OK MIC2 ERROR 55 gt VIEW DETAILS Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired micro phone parameter The RV 8 refers to the microphones according to the input connector to which the microphone is connected Press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected microphone A message similar to the one shown at the bottom of the previous column opens in the on screen display Refer to the table on the next page for information about all possible microphone check messages Note the following The RV 8 retains the calculated microphone level until the SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed Once this menu is closed another microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed Optional microphone kits that include two microphones are available Perform automatic calibration with two microphones that have passed the microphone check However the RV 8 will perform automatic calibration as long as at least one microphone passes the microphone check In this circumstance place the successfully checked microphone in the primary listening position If a microphone check was successful do not disconnect the microphones from the
319. ut on amplifier outputs 3 and 7 Note If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers a warning message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will be disabled for the M ain Zone when the 5 1 MAIN amp ZONE2 2 0 setting is chosen Press the right menu button to confirm the change Pressing any other button will cancel the change MAIN 5 1 amp ZONE3 2 0 Es gt Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3 Outputs 1 2 4 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone The input source selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7 Note If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers a warning message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5 1 MAIN amp ZONE3 2 0 setting is chosen Press the right menu button to confirm the change Pressing any other button will cancel the change 3 62 RV 8 Setup DISPLAY SETUP EX DISPLAYS Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu which is used to customize the on screen and front panel displays restore audio video synchronization and activate and create a custom unit name Parameter MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT D
320. utput connectors are available on a removable terminal block The PWR connector the power trigger output connector is not configurable It is activated when the RV 8 is powered on and deactivated when the RV 8 is powered off from the rear panel or by 2 8 RV 8 Basic Operation putting the RV 8 into standby The trigger output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or program operation See Trigger Setup on page 3 70 for more information 13 RS 232 CONNECTORS The RS 232 serial connector 1 provides serial control and is used to perform configuration downloads and flash memory software upgrades The RS 232 connector 2 is reserved for future developments 14 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone Eight connectors labeled Front L R Center Sub Side L R and Rear L R are available 15 IR IN CONNECTOR Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment One 3 5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug Tip Ring Sleeve connection or mono plug Tip Sleeve connection is available 16 ZONE AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS Provide analog audio video output in Zone 3 One stereo analog audio output variable level is available and can derive its source from a variety of analog sources One composite video output is available and can derive its source from any composite or S video source 17 ZONE2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS S PDIF Provides digital au
321. vates the corresponding input in the Main Zone Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Zone 2 or Zone 3 input is selected 5 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS Selects the corresponding input in Zone 2 When an input is selected an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection button When Zone 2 is deactivated pressing a Zone 2 input selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2 The Main Zone and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or Zone 3 input is selected 6 ZONE 3 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS Selects the corresponding input in Zone 3 When an input is selected a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection button When Zone 3 is deactivated pressing a Zone 3 input selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 3 The Main Zone and Zone 2 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or Zone 2 input is selected 7 TUNER SELECTION BUTTONS Tuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving recalling of presets See Tuner Overview on page 2 10 for additional information 8 STANDBY BUTTON Toggles the RV 8 between on and standby When the RV 8 is powered on pressing this button places the RV 8 into standby and lights the red LED on the button Power is supplied to the RV 8 when in standby When the RV 8 is in standby pressing the button turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previou
322. video output connector BACKGROUND ESS gt EE gt Activates and deactivates the menu background When set to ON on screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background depending on the display device When set to OFF on screen display menus appear over the video input signal ON OFF Note When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF the on screen display will disappear if the display device is using the component video output connector 3 65 Setup Lexicon FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SETUP Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu which is used to customize the front panel display MAIN MENU SETUP MODE ADJUST INPUTS AUDIO CONTROLS SPEAKERS TUNER PRESETS 1 0 CONFIG SETUP DISPLAYS VOLUME CONTROLS TRIGGER TUNER SETUP LOCK OPTIONS LIVE CALIBRATION POWER MANAGEMENT Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings STATUS ALWAYS ON ALWAYS ON 2 SECONDS ALWAYS OFF 100 75 50 25 BRIGHTNESS 100 STATUS ALWAYS ON 2 SECONDS ALWAYS OFF EZ Activates and deactivates the front panel display When set to ALWAYS ON the front panel display remains on at all times When set to 2 SECONDS the front panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV 8 receives a command When set to ALWAYS OFF the front panel display remains off at all times DISPLAY SETUP ON SCREEN DISPLAY FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SYNC DELAY CUSTOM NAME EDIT CUSTOM NAME
323. while the RV 8 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker As it finishes each the RV 8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the param eter label 3 49 Setup Lexicon PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION continued DISTANCES DISTANCES amp LEVELS LEVELS gt FRONT LEFT Refer to the table on page 3 52 for information about all possible speaker calibra tion messages AUTO SPEAKER SETUP DISTANCES OK LEVELS ERROR AUTO LEVELS FRONT LEFT CENTER FRONT RIGHT SIDE RIGHT AUTO DISTANCES FRONT LEFT 12 0ft CENTER 10 5ft FRONT RIGHT 12 08 SIDE RIGHT 4 511 REAR RIGHT ERROR REAR LEFT 6 011 SIDE LEFT 4 58 SUBWOOFER gt FRONT LEFT Refer to the table on page 3 52 for information about all possible speaker calibra tion messages AUTO VALUES APPLIED PRESS gt TO VIEW DETAILS REAR RIGHT REAR LEFT SIDE LEFT SUBWOOFER When the RV 8 is finished calibrating speaker distances and output levels if there was a calibration error the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screen is displayed indicating the 5 I results for each calibration procedure If there was a DISTANCES calibration d error an AUTO DISTANCES menu auto An OK message indicates that no errors matically displays during the calibration ure If there was a LEVELS calibration error an AUTO LEVELS menu automatically dis plays A value indicates that no errors
324. wn below The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input is selected The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable Default parameter settings differ from input to input The INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate default parameter settings for each input TV INPUT SETUP NAME TV DIGITALIN OPTICAL 2 ANALOGIN ANALOG 3 ANLGIN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN S VIDEO 5 COMPONENT IN 3 2 CH ETV 010 5 1 Ems FILM 5 1a 5 1a IE FILM MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG ZONE2 ADVANCED CD INPUT SETUP NAME cD DIGITAL IN COAX 3 ANALOGIN NONE ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN NON COMPONENT IN NONE 2 CH 191 MUSIC I 5 1 IMUSIC EM CTI IUS e 5 1 5 1a IMUSIC MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN DIGITAL ZONE2 ADVANCED TUNER INPUT SETUP NAME TUNER DIGITAL IN NONE ANALOG IN TUNER ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN NONE COMPONENT IN NONE 2 CH 9 5 1 LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG ZONE2 ADVANCED PHONO INPUT SETUP NAME PHONO DIGITAL IN NONE ANALOG IN PHONO ANLG IN LVL AUTO VIDEO IN NONE COMPONENT IN NONE 2 CH IZ MUSIC I 5 1 I IUS e ities MUSIC 5 1a 5 1a si MUSIC MIC LIVE MED MAIN ADVANCED ZONE2 IN ANLG ZONE2 ADVANCED B 3 Appendix Lexicon SETUP MENU INPUTS continued MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST AUDIO CONTROLS TUNER PRESETS SETUP DVD1 INPUT NAME EDIT INPUT NAME RESTORE D
325. y PL THX mode Applies THX re equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters Most films are mixed for movie theaters and may sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re equalization Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels which results in smoother sound movements between them Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings RE EQUALIZER ON ON OFF OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions DOLBY PRO LOGIC The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources It decodes four channels from Dolby Surround encoded sources and uses a mono surround channel with a high frequency rolloff above 7kHz This mode is useful for comparison purposes particularly with the L7 FILM Dolby MOVIE and DTS Neo 6 CIN listening mode Parameter OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6 37 CUSTOM Refer to page 6 37 See Listening Mode M enu Option and Parameter Descriptions on page 6 39 for detailed descriptions Adjust Lexicon DTS NEO 6 THX This mode is designed for playback of matrix encoded digital stereo film sources DTS Neo 6 derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are present rear channels will be in parallel It derives

Lexicon RV-8 Stereo Receiver User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents